Motorola DB Param Definition

OTI - RF Plannning & Optimization

Type Count40810970974462166537

381

2424622

56Total 971

CM DBTimer CellHOPower ControlQuality MetricPagingMulti LayerCongestion ResolutionConcentric CellCell BroadcastBTSTrace ParametersGPRSDYNETLinksBSCBSSMSCDevice Function Parameters

F3

sarmad.saad:

DATABASE PARAMETER

adap_ho_alt_trigger_rxqual

adap_ho_pbgt

adap_ho_rxlev

adap_ho_rxqual

adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_dl

adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_ul

adap_trigger_pbgt

adap_trigger_rxlev_dl

adap_trigger_rxlev_ul

adap_trigger_rxqual_dl

adap_trigger_rxqual_ul

adap_trigger_pbgt_nbr

allow_32k_trau

alt_qual_proc

attach_detach

auto_rf_loss_trace

ba_alloc_proc

band_preference

band_preference_mode

ber_loss_daily

ber_loss_hourly

bounce_protect_margin

bs_ag_blks_res

bs_pa_mfrms

bsc_type

bsic

bss_msc_overload_allowed

bssgp_block_retries

bssgp_flow_control

bssgp_racap_retries

bssgp_reset_retries

bssgp_scheduling

bssgp_unblock_retries

bts_p_con_ack

bts_p_con_interval

bts_power_control_allowed

bts_txpwr_max_inner

bts_type

bvci

call_trace_options

called_pci

calling_pci

carrier_disable_time

carriers_ins_pwr_fail

cbc_fast_select

cbc_intface_vers

cbc_vbind_cntr

cbch_enabled

cbs_outage_cntr

ccch_conf

ccch_load_period

cell_bar_access_class

cell_bar_access_switch

cell_bar_qualify

cell_reselect_hysteresis

cell_reselect_offset

cell_reselect_param_ind

channel_reconfiguration_switch

cic_error_clr_threshold

cic_error_decrement

cic_error_gen_threshold

cic_error_increment

cic_validation

ciph_mode_rej_allowed

clk_src_fail_reset_period

coincident_cell

coincident_mb

coincident_offset

confusion_msg_allowed

congest_at_source

congest_at_target

congest_ho_margin

cp_option_reset_ckt

cp_option_rr_status

cr_calling

ct_flow_control_hi_level

ct_flow_control_lo_level

ct_flow_control_msc_trace

data_qual_enabled

decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_h

decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_ih

decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_p

decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_h

decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_p

decision_1_n1/decision_1_p1




decision_1_ncell_rxlev_av_h_calc

decision_1_p_bgt_rxlev_av_h

decision_1_tim_adv_av_alg

decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_h

decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_ih

decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_p

decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_h

decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_p

decision_alg_type

direct_inner_zone_threshold

disuse_cnt_hreqave

dl_audio_lev_offset

dl_dtx_voice_data

dl_rxlev_ho_allowed

dl_rxqual_ho_allowed

dnlk_vad_dtx

dpc

dr_allowed

dr_chan_mode_modify

dr_ho_during_assign

dr_preference

dr_standard_congest

dtx_required

dual_band_offset

dyn_step_adj

dyn_step_adj_fmpr

dynet_tchs_reserved

early_classmark_sending

eas_alarm

eas_alarm_type

eas_report_opto

eas_severity

efr_enabled

egsm_bcch_sd

egsm_handover_threshold

emergency_class_switch

en_incom_ho

erc_ta_priority

ext_range_cell

extended_paging_active

frequency_type

full_pwr_rfloss

gclk_qwarm_flag

global_reset_repetitions

gproc_slots

gprs_bs_cv_max

gprs_dl_pwr_mode

gprs_drx_timer_max

gprs_enabled

gprs_intraho_allwd

gprs_mac_mode

gprs_ms_pan_dec

gprs_ms_pan_inc

gprs_ms_pan_max

gprs_ms_txpwr_max_cch

gprs_network_operation_mode

gprs_pb

gprs_pc_alpha

gprs_pc_meas_chan

gprs_reconfig_thresh_idle_tch

gprs_sig_bvci

group_block_unblock_allowed

gsm_cell_id_format

handover_power_level

handover_required_curr_ch

handover_required_reject_switch

handover_required_sp_ver_used

hdsl_losw_oos

hdsl_losw_restore

hdsl_snr_daily

hdsl_snr_hourly

hdsl_snr_hourly_period

hdsl_snr_oos

hdsl_snr_restore

ho_exist_congest

ho_margin_def

ho_margin_type5

ho_margin_usage_flag

ho_only_max_pwr

ho_pwr_level_inner

hop_count

hop_qual_enabled

hopping_support

hopping_systems_enabled

hopping_systems_hsn

hopping_systems_mobile_alloc

illegal_circuit_id

immediate_assign_mode

inner_zone_alg

intave

inter_cell_handover_allowed

interband_ho_allowed

interfer_bands

interfer_ho_allowed

intra_cell_handover_allowed

ksw_config

l_rxlev_dl_h

l_rxlev_dl_p

l_rxlev_ul_h

l_rxlev_ul_p

l_rxqual_dl_h

l_rxqual_dl_h_data

l_rxqual_dl_h_hopping

l_rxqual_dl_p

l_rxqual_dl_p_data

l_rxqual_dl_p_hopping

l_rxqual_ul_h

l_rxqual_ul_h_data

l_rxqual_ul_h_hopping


l_rxqual_ul_p

l_rxqual_ul_p_data

l_rxqual_ul_p_hopping

land_layer1_mode

layer_number

link_about_to_fail

link_fail

local_maintenance

low_sig_thresh

lta_alarm_range

ltu_fw_auto_download

max_ms_dl_buffer

max_ms_dl_rate

max_number_of_sdcchs

max_q_length_full_rate_channel

max_q_length_sdcch

max_retran

max_rst_ckt_timer_exps

max_tx_bts

max_tx_ms

mb_preference

mb_tch_congest_thres

missing_rpt

mmi_cell_id_format

mms_cat_enable

mms_config_type

ms_distance_allowed

ms_max_range

ms_p_con_ack

ms_p_con_interval

ms_power_control_allowed

ms_power_offset

ms_txpwr_max_cch

ms_txpwr_max_cell

ms_txpwr_max_def

ms_txpwr_max_inner

msc_preference

msc_qt

mspwr_alg

mtl_loadshare_granularity

multiband_reporting

n_avg_i

ncc_of_plmn_allowed

neighbor_journal

ni

ns_alive_retries

ns_block_retries

ns_unblock_retries

nsei

num_audit_retries

num_emerg_access

num_emerg_rejected

num_emerg_tch_kill

num_emerg_term_sdcch

num_gbl_dl_thrput_samples

num_gbl_ul_thrput_samples

number_of_preferred_cells

number_sdcchs_preferred

opc

option_alg_a5_1

option_alg_a5_2

option_alg_a5_3

option_alg_a5_4

option_alg_a5_5

option_alg_a5_6

option_alg_a5_7

option_emergency_preempt

outer_zone_usage_level

override_intra_bss_pre_transfer

override_speech_version

pbgt_mode

pcr_enable

pcr_n1

pcr_n2

phase2_classmark_allowed

phase2_resource_ind_allowed

phase_lock_gclk

pool_gproc_preemption

poor_initial_assignment

pow_inc_step_size_dl

pow_inc_step_size_ul

pow_red_step_size_dl

pow_red_step_size_ul

prioritize_microcell

protect_last_ts

pwr_handover_allowed

pwrc

queue_management_information

ra_colour

rac

rach_load_period

rach_load_threshold

rach_load_type

radio_link_timeout

rapid_pwr_down

rci_error_clr_threshold

rci_error_decrement

rci_error_gen_threshold

rci_error_increment

red_loss_daily

red_loss_hourly

red_loss_oos

red_loss_restore

red_time_oos

red_time_restore

reestablish_allowed

rel_tim_adv

remote_loss_daily

remote_loss_hourly

remote_loss_oos

remote_loss_restore

remote_time_oos

remote_time_restore

report_resource_tch_f_high_water_mark

report_resource_tch_f_low_water_mark

rf_res_ind_period

rpd_offset

rpd_period

rpd_trigger

rpt_bad_qual_no_mr

rtf_path_enable

rxlev_access_min

rxlev_dl_ho

rxlev_dl_pc

rxlev_dl_zone

rxlev_min_def

rxlev_ul_ho

rxlev_ul_pc

rxlev_ul_zone

rxqual_dl_ho

rxqual_dl_pc

rxqual_ul_ho

rxqual_ul_pc

sap_audit_type

sap_device_type

sap_end_time

sap_interval

sap_start_time

sccp_bssap_mgt

sdcch_ho

sdcch_need_high_water_mark

sdcch_need_low_water_mark

sdcch_tch_band_reassign_delay

sdcch_timer_ho

second_asgnmnt

secondary_freq_type

slip_loss_daily

slip_loss_hourly

slip_loss_oos

slip_loss_restore

smg_gb_vers

smg_um_vers

sms_dl_allowed

sms_tch_chan

sms_ul_allowed

ss7_mode

ssm_critical_overload_threshold

ssm_normal_overload_threshold

ssp_burst_delay


ssp_burst_delay

ssp_burst_limit

stat_interval

surround_cell

swfm_enable

sync_loss_daily

sync_loss_hourly

sync_loss_oos

sync_loss_restore

sync_time_oos

sync_time_restore

t_avg_t

t_avg_w

tch_busy_critical_threshold

tch_busy_norm_threshold

tch_congest_prevent_thres

tch_flow_control

tch_full_need_low_water_mark

temporary_offset

threshold

timing_advance_period

trace_msgs_after_ho

trace_msgs_before_ho

trunk_critical_threshold

trunk_major_threshold

ts_alloc_flag

tsc_update_method

tx_integer

tx_power_cap

u_rxlev_dl_ih

u_rxlev_dl_p

u_rxlev_ul_ih

u_rxlev_ul_p

u_rxqual_dl_p

u_rxqual_ul_p

ul_audio_lev_offset

ul_rxlev_ho_allowed

ul_rxqual_ho_allowed

unequipped_circuit_allowed

use_derived_ho_power

use_neighbor_pbgt_hreqave

volume_control_type

wait_for_reselection

wait_indication_parameters

worse_neighbor_ho

zone_ho_hyst

Description

The adap_ho_alt_trigger_rxqual parameter specifies whether the system usesalternative trigger values for adaptive quality handovers for a cell which is frequencyhopping.If adaptive handovers are enabled for rxqual, this parameter enables the use of thehopping thresholds for calls that are frequency hopping.

The adap_ho_pbgt parameter specifies whether the system allows adaptive powerbudget handovers. The cumulative area for the adaptive power budget handovers canbe defined as “per cell” or “per neighbor”.At each measurement report, the cumulative area are updated and compared to acumulative trigger. If the area is greater than the cumulative power budget (pbgt) triggera need for a handover is recognized.

The adap_ho_rxlev parameter specifies whether the system allows adaptive receivelevel handovers.At each measurement report the cumulative area are updated and compared to acumulative trigger. If the area is greater than the cumulative power adaptive receive level(rxlev) trigger a need for a handover is recognized.

The adap_ho_rx_qual parameter specifies whether the system allows adaptive qualityhandovers.At each measurement report the cumulative area is updated and compared to acumulative trigger. If the area is greater than the cumulative power adaptive quality(rxqual) trigger a need for a handover is recognized.

The adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_dl parameter specifies the trigger threshold for downlinkrxqual for calls which are frequency hopping.

The adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_ul parameter specifies the trigger threshold for uplinkrxqual for calls which are frequency hopping.

The adap_trigger_pbgt parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level for adaptivepower budget handovers.When the threshold set by adap_trigger_pbgt is exceeded, the system triggers ahandover to a better cell.

The adap_trigger_rxqual_dl parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level foradaptive receive level downlink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs a downlinkstrength handover.

The adap_trigger_rxlev_ul parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level for adaptivereceive level uplink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs an uplinkstrength handover.

The adap_trigger_rxqual_dl parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level foradaptive rxqual downlink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs a downlinkquality handover.

The adap_trigger_rxqual_ul parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level foradaptive rxqual uplink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs an uplinkquality handover.

The adap_trigger_pbgt_nbr parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level for theadaptive handover power budget algorithm.When the threshold is set by adap_trigger_pbgt_nbr is exceeded, the system triggers ahandover to a better cell.

The allow_32k_trau parameter enables or disables 32 kbps GPRS TRAU timeslots on acarrier. When this parameter is enabled for an RTF, all GPRS TRAU channels are 32bkps channels. Both CS-3 and CS-4 are supported.Both BSC-PCU GDS and BSC-BTS may be equipped. The BSS calculates bandwidthrequirements during the equipage of the timeslots.

The alt_qual_proc parameter specifies whether receive quality processing is performedusing Bit Error Rate (BER) values or Quality Band (QBand) units. The type of valuesand the range of values of six parameters are determined by the value assigned to thealt_qual_proc parameter.

The attach_detach parameter enables and disables the mandatory International MobileSubscriber Identity (IMSI) attach/detach for the MS.

The auto_rf_loss_trace parameter enables and disables automatic RF Loss tracing fora cell. The destination for RF loss measurement reports is also specified when RF losstracing is enabled.If the auto_rf_loss_trace parameter is enabled for a cell with the destination set for theMMI and an RF loss occurs in the cell, a measurement report is sent to the MMI and isdisplayed in the same format as the output for the trace_call command. An RLM causefor the RF loss is included in the additional trace status field when the measurementreport when generated by the RF loss trace.

The ba_alloc_proc parameter enables and disables the reinitialization of the active blockfollowing a change in the broadcast control channel allocation (BA) and the suspension ofsubsequent measurements until the new BA is reported.

The band_preference parameter displays the frequency bands that the cell prefers touse for handovers and specifies the destination frequency band for intercell handovers.

The band_preference_mode parameter specifies the method the system uses toprogram a MultiBand MS with the preferred frequency band for a given cell in the BSS.

The ber_loss_daily parameter specifies the daily Bit Error Rate (BER) alarm threshold.An alarm is generated if the BER exceeds this threshold in a given 24 hour period.

The bsc_type parameter specifies the BSC configuration type.

The ber_loss_hourly parameter specifies the hourly Bit Error Rate (BER) alarmthreshold.This parameter represents the exponent of threshold BER. For example, 3 would be theexponent value of 103, indicating 1 bit error in 1000 bits.An alarm is generated if the BER exceeds this threshold in a given 60 minute period.

The bounce_protect_margin parameter, in conjunction with the ho_margin_cellparameter, specifies the level by which a target cell must exceed the serving cell.This parameter prevents continuous handover bouncing between cells due to RXQUALlevel and congestion reasons.

The bs_ag_blks_res parameter specifies the number of blocks reserved for accessgrant per 51–multiframes. The number of blocks reserved starting with (and including)block 0 are broadcast in the BCCH. The number of paging blocks available are reducedby the number of blocks reserved for access grant messages.The choice of value is determined by the ratio of MS-originated calls to MS-terminatedcalls.PCH and AGCH share the same TDMA mapping when combined onto a basic physicalchannel. Channels are shared on a block by block basis.

The bs_pa_mfrms parameter specifies the number of multiframes betweentransmissions of paging messages to MSs of the same paging group. The number ofpaging blocks available (per CCCH) are those available (on a specific CCCH) multipliedby (bs_pa_mfrms).

The bsic parameter specifies the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC).The BSIC is a local colour code that allows an MS to distinguish between differentneighbouring base stations. The BSIC is encoded on the Synchronization Channel.The size of the BSIC is one octet made up of two values: Network Colour Code (NCC). The NCC is three bits and is the same as the Publicland mobile network (PLMN) Colour Code. Base station Colour Code (BCC). The BCC is also three bits.The values for the NCC and BCC may range from 000 to 111.

This parameter enables and disables the BSS to bar all access classes when anOVERLOAD message is received at the MSC.

The bssgp_block_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for cell block messages to the SGSN.

The bssgp_flow_control parameter specifies the downlink flow control mechanism forthe PCU.

The bssgp_racap_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for RA-Capability-Update messages to the SGSN.

The bssgp_reset_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for Reset messages to the SGSN.

The bssgp_scheduling parameter specifies the scheduling type used in downlink flowcontrol at the PCU. Packets can be scheduled on either a First In/First Out or an EarliestDeadline First basis.

The bssgp_unblock_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for cell Unblock messages to the SGSN.

The bts_p_con_ack parameter specifies the maximum amount of time to wait for RFpower change acknowledgements to the BSS. This allows a repeat of the BTS powercontrol message if the BTS power has not been confirmed. This is effective only if thedecision_alg_num equals 1.

The bts_p_con_interval parameter specifies the minimum amount of time in multiples oftwo SACCH multiframes between successive RF power change orders to the BSS.The time period is greater than or equal to (nx – px + 1) hreqave / 2Where: x equals– 1 (lower threshold of RXLEV),– 2 (upper threshold of RXLEV),– 3 (lower threshold of RXQUAL), or– 4 (upper threshold of RXQUAL). n equals the values assigned for decision_1_ny where y is a value from 1 to 4. p equals the values assigned for decision_1_py where y is a value from 1 to 4. hreqave is the number of measurements from the MS that are used in calculatingone average.

The bts_power_control_allowed parameter enables or disables the downlink RF powercontrol for the BSS. When enabled, the BSS uses up to 15 power control levels.

The bts_txpwr_max_inner parameter specifies the maximum transmit power BTS innerzone for Dual Band cells.

The bts_type parameter specifies the BTS configuration type. It is valid only for sites 1to 100.

The bvci parameter specifies a BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier (BVCI). There mustbe one BVCI per cell and one signalling BVCI per BSS. BVCIs are automaticallygenerated by the BSS on creation of a cell.

The call_trace_options parameter enables or disables MSC initiated traces. It alsospecifies the percentage of traces exclusively reserved for MSC initiated call traces.The number of call trace instances that may be created is affected by the percentage oftraces reserved exclusively for MSC initiated traces. This percentage is specified usingthe call_trace_options element. For example, if 50% of the traces are reserved forinitiation from the MSC, a maximum of eight instances may be created using thetrace_call command.

The called_pci parameter specifies whether point code is included in the called partyaddress in the SCCP messages.

The calling_pci parameter enables or disables point code inclusion for the calling partyaddress in the SCCP messages.

The carrier_disable_time parameter specifies the time delay between putting individualcarriers into battery conservation mode after a main power failure is reported.For example, when a main power failure is first reported the system waits for the periodof time specified by the carrier_disable_time parameter before placing the first carrierinto battery conservation mode. Then the system waits for the same period of timebefore placing the next carrier into battery conservation mode.

The carriers_ins_pwr_fail parameter specifies the number of carriers (RCUs) left up inthe maintenance power state when emergency battery power starts (that is, during amain power failure).

The cbc_fast_select parameter enables and disables the fast connect function for theBSC. The fast connect function supports X.25 networks that do not support user data inconnect and disconnect requests.

The cbc_intface_vers parameter selects the interface for each BSC site.The available interfaces are either the standard interface or the interface with therepetition rate interpretation and CBCH loading fields.

The cbc_vbind_cntr parameter sets the number of successful VBINDs sent by the BSSto the CBC before a negotiate must take place within the next VBIND sent.This parameter is effective on a per BSC basis.

The cbch_enabled parameter enables the Cell Broadcast Channel (CBCH) option in acell.The CBCH is used with the Short Message Service (SMS) Cell Broadcast feature. Anoperator defined message or set of background messages may be transmitted on theCBCH when the cbch_enabled parameter is enabled.

The cbs_outage_cntr parameter introduces a delay between an outage occurring andthe CBS halting transmission of CBC originated messages.This parameter is effective on a per BTS site basis.

The ccch_conf parameter specifies the organization of the Common Control Channels(CCCH) on the BCCH. This field defines whether the CCCHs are combined with SDCCHand SACCH onto the same basic physical channel. The value depends on the size ofthe cell and on the number of access attempts expected on the cell.

The ccch_load_period parameter specifies the number of TDMA multiframes betweensuccessive calculations of the RACH load during overload conditions.

The cell_bar_access_class parameter specifies access classes that are barred (or notbarred) access to the PLMN. A channel request is initiated only when the access classof a mobile is “not barred”. The list of authorized access classes is broadcast on theBCCH by way of SYSTEM INFORMATION messages. Also broadcast are the classesthat have access to emergency calls.

The cell_bar_access_switch parameter specifies whether or not subscribers are barredaccess to a cell in idle mode.Emergency calls (user class 10) are not, and cannot be, barred.

The cell_bar_qualify parameter is used by the network to control MS cell selection.

The cell_reselect_hysteresis parameter specifies the hysteresis level for cellreselection into a different location area. The new cell is selected only if the path losscriterion parameter (C1) on the new cell exceeds C1 on the old cell by a minimum ofvalue assigned to the cell_reselect_hysteresis parameter.Differences in received signal levels from 0 to 14 dB (in 2 dB increments) are used forcell reselection.

The cell_reselect_offset parameter specifies a C2 offset value for the MS. C2 is thereselection priority assigned to a cell which can be broadcast on the BCCH of each cell.When more than one cell is available for reselection, the MS reselects the cell with thehighest C2 value.Lower C2 values discourage fast moving MSs from selecting a specific cell. Highervalues encourage MSs to reselect a specific cell.

The cell_reselect_parameter_ind parameter specifies whether the C2 parameters(cell_bar_qualify, cell_reselect_offset, temporary_offset, and penalty_time) are broadcastto the MS by the network in the system information messages.

The channel_reconfiguration_switch parameter enables and disables dynamicchannel reconfiguration (reassignment) of traffic channels to Standalone DedicatedControl Channels (SDCCHs).The Cell Resource Manager (CRM) may attempt to reconfigure an idle TCH into anSDCCH if a high proportion of SDCCHs are in use and additional SDCCH requests arereceived. The reconfiguration process continues until the number of idle SDCCHsreaches the sdcch_need_high_water_mark value.The reconfiguration process stops when the number of idle TCHs goes below thetch_full_need_low_water_mark value or when the total number of SDCCHs configuredreaches the max_number_of sdcchs value.

The cic_error_clr_threshold parameter specifies the CIC error count clearing thresholdat the BSC. When the error count reaches or falls below this threshold the alarm clears.

The cic_error_decrement parameter specifies the CIC error decrement value. Thesystem updates the CIC error count by this value whenever a successful call is made.For example, if cic_error_decrement is set to two, each successful call decreases theerror count by two and two successful calls decrease the count by four.

The cic_error_gen_threshold parameter specifies the CIC error count threshold at theBSC. Once this threshold is reached, further CIC errors do not increase the CIC errorcount. When this threshold is reached or exceeded an alarm is generated.If the error count threshold is exceeded, the error count resets to the error countthreshold value.

The cic_error_increment parameter specifies the CIC error increment value. Thesystem updates the CIC error count by this value whenever an error is detected.For example, if cic_error_increment is set to two. each detected error increases theerror count by two, so that two errors are counted as four.

The cic_validation parameter enables or disables the CIC (Circuit Identity Code)validation.

The ciph_mode_rej_allowed parameter enables or disables the Cipher Mode Rejectmessage to be sent to the MSC. This message generates when the Cipher ModeCommand message from the MSC specifies ciphering that the BSS cannot perform.

The clk_src_fail_reset_period parameter specifies the length of time for which the OOScount is kept for the MMSs at a site. At the end of the reset period, all of the MMS OOScounts are reset to zero.The OOS counts are used in the selection process for an MMS as a reference clock forGCLK synchronization. If several MMSs have the same value assigned to themms_priority parameter, the MMS with the lowest OOS count is selected.

The coincident_cell parameter specifies the cell that is coincident to the cell specified inthe chg_cell_element coincident_mb prompt or the disp_cell command.

The coincident_mb parameter specifies the ability of a BTS to execute the CoincidentMultiBand Handover option.

The coincident_offset parameter enables and disables the configuration of an additionaloffset to the ho_margin value between a cell and its coincident cell. The system usesthe coincident_offset value when a handover from a MultiBand MS is based on thereceive level for the serving cell.

The confusion_msg_allowed parameter enables and disables the BSS to sendConfusion messages over the A interface when an erroneous message is received fromthe MSC. If this parameter is not enabled, the system generates an alarm instead ofsending a message to the MSC.

The congest_at_source parameter specifies how a specified source cell treats targetcells when trying to find candidates for an imperative handover.The specified source cell may be enabled to: (a) treat all target cells equally or (b)immediately retry target cells which were in the process of congestion relief.

The congest_at_target parameter specifies how a specified cell behaves if it rejects ahandover request.

The congest_ho_margin parameter specifies the margin of a congestion handover. Tomake it easier to handover to this neighbour in the case of congestion in the current cell,this parameter value should be less that the value of the handover margin(s).To disable congestion handovers to this neighbour, set the congestion handover marginto the maximum value.

The cp_option_reset_ckt parameter enables and disables the reset circuit feature.

The cp_option_rr_status parameter enables and disables the radio resource status.If this is enabled, the BSS can generate the 4.08 radio resource status message to theMS.

This parameter enables or disables the calling party address being included in the SCCPmessage Connection Request.

The ct_flow_control_hi_level parameter specifies the percentage of call trace OMLbuffer space that may be used before flow control is enabled. When this limit is reached,the BSS parameter ct_flow_control_bss_enabled is set to 1. (This level is not used todisable flow control.)Setting this parameter to 100 disables flow control.

The ct_flow_control_lo_level parameter specifies the percentage of call trace OMLbuffer space that may be used before flow control is enabled. When this limit is reached,the BSS parameter ct_flow_control_bss_enabled is set to 0. (This level is not used todisable flow control.)

The ct_flow_control_msc_trace parameter specifies whether or not MSC traces areallowed when flow control is enabled.

The data_qual_enabled parameter enables or disables the use of specific rxqualthresholds for data call handovers.A data call is one that involves the transmission of computer data, such as amodem–to–modem call. These types of calls are very sensitive to bit errors. Therefore,specific rxqual thresholds may be configured to trigger data call handovers.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to make the handover decisions for downlink signal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handoveralgorithm data.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to make handover decisions for downlink signal interference.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to generate power control changes due to downlink signal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to generate handover decisions due to downlink receive quality(rxqual).This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to generate power control changes due to downlink receive quality(rxqual).This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

These parameters specify N1 and P1 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N1 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions toincrease uplink and downlink power. P1 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If a least P1averages out of N1 averages are lower than RSS handover threshold l_rxlev_ul_p(uplink) or RSS handover threshold l_rxlev_dl_p (downlink), the corresponding uplink ordownlink power must be increased.

These parameters specify N2 and P2 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N2 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions todecrease uplink and downlink power. P2 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P2averages out of N2 averages are greater than RSS handover threshold u_rxlev_ul_p(uplink) or RSS handover threshold u_rxlev_dl_p (downlink), the corresponding uplink ordownlink transmit power (txpwr) must be decreased.

These parameters specify N3 and P3 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N3 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions toincrease uplink and downlink power. P3 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P3averages out of N3 averages are greater (worse quality) than RSS handover thresholdl_rxqual_ul_p (uplink) or RSS handover threshold l_rxqual_dl_p (downlink), thecorresponding uplink or downlink transmit power (txpwr) must be increased.

These parameters specify N4 and P4 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N4 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions todecrease uplink and downlink power. P4 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P4averages out of N4 averages are lower (better quality) than RSS handover thresholdu_rxqual_ul_p (uplink) or RSS handover threshold u_rxqual_dl_p (downlink), thecorresponding uplink or downlink transmit power (txpwr) must be decreased.

These parameters specify N5 and P5 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N5 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in handoverdecisions. P5 is the number of samples in the processed measurement (process)relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P5 averages out of N5 averagesare lower than RSS handover threshold l_rxlev_ul_h (uplink) or RSS handover thresholdl_rxlev_dl_h (downlink), a handover might be required.

These parameters specify N6 and P6 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N6 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in handoverdecisions. P6 is the number of samples in the processed measurement (process)relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P6 averages out of N6 averagesare greater (worse quality) than RSS handover threshold l_rxqual_ul_h (uplink) or RSShandover threshold l_rxqual_dl_h (downlink), a handover may be needed.

These parameters specify N7 and P7 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N7 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process. P7 is the number ofsamples in the processed measurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm inplace.If at least P7 averages out of N7 averages are greater than RSS handover thresholdu_rxlev_ul_ih (uplink) or RSS handover threshold u_rxlev_dl_ih (downlink), an internalhandover might be required if rxqual_ul/dl is also greater than l_rxqual_ul/dl_h.

These parameters specify N8 and P8 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N8 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process. P8 is the number ofsamples in the processed measurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm inplace.If at least P8 averages out of N8 averages are greater than RSS handover thresholdms_range_max, a handover might be required due to distance.

The decision_1_ncell_rxlev_av_h_calc parameter specifies which bin is used in thesurround_cell parameter for the purposes of candidate ordering. Therefore, it alsospecifies the hreqave value to use.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_p_bgt_rxlev_av_h parameter specifies which bin is used for therxlev_dl_ho and surround_cell parameters for the purposes of making a Better Cellpower budget (pbgt) handover decision.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

The decision_1_tim_adv_av_alg parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to make handover decisions due todistance.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_h parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to make handover decisions due to uplinksignal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_ih parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to make handover decisions due to uplinksignal interference.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_p parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to generate power control changes due touplink signal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

The decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_h parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to generate handover decisions due touplink signal quality.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_p parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to generate power control changes due touplink receive quality.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

The decision_alg_type parameter specifies the current power control algorithm.Disabling the decision_alg_type type parameter uses the bts_p_con_interval andms_p_con_interval parameters. This setting does not allow use of the bts_p_con_ackand ms_p_con_ack timers.Enabling decision_alg_type uses the bts_p_con_ack and ms_p_con_ack timers.Enabling the decision_alg_type parameter allows a power decision based on quality toincrease the power. This results in a rxlev above the upper rxlev thresholds set in:u_rxlev_dl_pcu_rxlev_ul_pc

The direct_inner_zone_threshold parameter specifies the rxlev threshold that must beexceeded by the MS reported rxlev for the call to qualify for accelerated allocation of aninner zone resource.

If the disuse_cnt_hreqave parameter is enabled, neighbour cells with a disuse countless than or equal to the maximum disuse count are still valid candidates for handovers.Disuse count is the number of consecutive measurement reports a previously reportedneighbour is not reported by the mobile station. If the neighbor is reported before themaximum disuse count is reached, the disuse count is reset to 0.If enabled, the maximum disuse count is defined by the surrounding cell hreqave.

The dl_audio_lev_offset parameter specifies the downlink volume control offset on aper BSS basis. The offset is in 1 dB steps with a maximum increase or decrease of 30dB (between –15 dB and 15 dB).The audio level parameters affect background and comfort noise. The audio levelparameters do not affect data.

The dl_dtx_voice_data parameter specifies the option for downlink discontinuoustransmission (DTX) for speech and voice.

The dl_rxlev_ho_allowed parameter enables or disables a handover due to downlinkreceive level (rxlev).

The dl_rxqual_ho_allowed parameter enables or disables a handover due to downlinkreceive quality (rxqual).

The dnlk_vad_dtx parameter enables or disables downlink Voice ActivatedDetection/Discontinuous Transmission (VAD/DTX) at the RXCDR or at the localtranscoding BSC.If VAD is disabled, no silence/voice detection takes place and no DTX is possible forspeech calls, regardless of the value of dl_dtx_voice_data.This parameter replaces the xcdr_d_vad_dtx command.

The dr_allowed parameter enables or disables the Directed Retry option.

The dpc parameter specifies the Destination Point Code (DPC). The range of valuesdepends on the setting of the ss7_mode parameter.The system checks the value of the opc and ss7_mode variables and compares them tothe value for ss7_mode. If the ranges are not compatible, the system rejects thechanges and displays the following message:COMMAND ACCEPTED: WARNING: When opc equals dpc, communication with MSC isimpossible.

The dr_chan_mode_modify parameter determines if the channel mode modifyprocedure will follow a successful handover of a Phase 1 MS in which the channel modechanged to full rate speech. The BSS reads this parameter only in the case of asuccessful handover in which the channel mode changed, the MS is Phase 1, and thenew channel mode is full rate speech.Changing the channel mode during a handover occurs only during a Directed Retryprocedure. For this to occur, either an external Directed Retry handover has successfullycompleted to this BSS or an intra-BSS Directed Retry handover has successfullycompleted and either the database parameter dr_standard_congest ordr_ho_during_assign is enabled in the source cell.

The dr_ho_during_assign parameter determines if a handover is handled during anassignment procedure.This parameter can only be changed at the BSC.This parameter will be copied if the copy_cell command is used.This parameter is not read if the dr_preference parameter is disabled.

The dr_preference parameter enables or disables the Directed Retry procedures.

The dr_standard_congest parameter enables or disables the standard Directed Retrycongestion procedure is enabled in the cell. The procedure initiates a handover ifpossible for a call needing a TCH in the case of congestion.This parameter will be copied if the copy_cell command is used.

The dtx_required parameter specifies the MS capability to use discontinuoustransmission (DTX). Enabling this feature helps to reduce interference and prolongbattery life.

The dual_band_offset parameter estimates the effects of the power level differencesthat occur when comparing signal strengths from different zones. Thedual_band_offset is applied to power budget handover calculations from the inner zoneto cells of any frequency type. Plus, it is used to evaluate the criteria for the interzonehandovers within a cell.

The dyn_step_adj parameter enables or disables the uplink and downlink dynamic stepadjustment algorithm for the step size. When enabled, the calculation of step size caninclude or exclude dynamic power reduction caused by the level being above the upperlevel threshold.

The dyn_step_adj_fmpr parameter specifies the percentage power reduction used inthe dynamic power reduction calculation.

The dynet_tchs_reserved parameter specifies the amount of terrestrial backingresources reserved for a changing cell when dynamic allocation is enabled for the sitecontaining the cell.The system rejects this parameter if the new value causes the total terrestrial backingresources for a BTS network to be less then the total reserved cell capacity. The total terrestrial backing resources for a BTS network is the sum of theterrestrial backing resources reserved on the DYNETs for the BTS network. The total reserved cell capacity for a site is the sum of the reserved capacity for allof the cells at the site minus the dedicated resources for the site. If this total isless than zero, it is set at zero. The total reserved cell capacity for a BTSnetworks is then the sum of the total reserved cell capacity of the dynamicallocation BTSs in the BTS network.

The early_classmark_sending parameter specifies the following: Whether the BSS suppresses the early sending of the Classmark Update messageto the MSC. Whether an MS is allowed to send an early Classmark Change message.

The eas_alarm parameter is the text component of the EAS (External Alarm System)alarm table. The EAS alarm table consists of 34 indexed pairs consisting of a textcomponent and a severity level. The text component and severity level are assignedwhen the EAS alarm table is initialized using the chg_eas_alarm command. The textcomponent of an indexed pair may only be changed using the chg_eas_alarmcommand.The index number uniquely identifies each text and severity pair in the EAS alarm table.Index numbers are required to specify which of the 34 pairs to display. Index values are 0to 33.

The eas_alarm_type parameter specifies one of the EAS (External Alarm System)alarm table elements to one of eight optocouplers of an addressed PIX card. Theeas_alarm_type value corresponds to the index number identifying the location of a textand severity level pair.Index numbers are required to specify which of the 34 pairs to display. Index values are0 to 33.The disp_element command displays the optocouplers and indexed alarm text andseverity pairs assigned with the map_eas_opto command.The output of the disp_element command appears in the form:eas_alarm_type = x y x y x y x y x ywhere each x corresponds to an opto# and each y corresponds to an alarm text andseverity pair.

The eas_report_opto parameter specifies whether or not each of the eight optocouplers(optos) on a specific PIX card will report state changes.Index numbers are required. Index numbers are used to identify the desired EAS device.Index values are assigned during installation.The output of the disp_element command appears in the form:eas_report_opto = 1 = ON 2 = ON 3 = OFF 4 = ON 5 = OFF 6 = ON 7 = ON 8 = ONwhere 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, and 8 report state changes but 3 and 5 do not.

The eas_severity parameter specifies the severity level component of the EAS (ExternalAlarm System) alarm table.The index number uniquely identifies each text and severity pair in the EAS alarm table.The EAS alarm table consists of 34 indexed pairs consisting of a text component and aseverity level. The text component and severity level are assigned when the EAS alarmtable is initialized using the chg_eas_alarm command. The severity component may bechanged using either the chg_element or the chg_eas_alarm command. If thechg_eas_alarm command is used, it permits the alarm text to be changed at the sametime.“Clear” is a valid alarm condition, but it is not a valid alarm severity setting. All alarms ofseverity levels 0 to 4 can receive a “clear” indication for the original pegging of an alarmwhen a system is running.

The efr_enabled parameter enables or disables the Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).

The egsm_bcch_sd parameter specifies whether or not the cell is configured for bothBCCH carriers and the placement of SDCCH channels for the Extended GSM (EGSM)cell.

The egsm_handover_threshold parameter specifies the range of interference bandsallowed for handing over an extended GSM MS using a primary resource which isneeded by a primary MS. Allowed interference bands are those above or meeting aspecified threshold, which are considered best quality resources. Forced handovers maybe disallowed by disabling the egsm_handover_threshold parameter.

The emergency_class_switch parameter enables or disables emergency calls byaccess class.When disabled, all emergency calls are allowed.When enabled, only emergency calls from classes 11 to 15 are allowed.

The en_incom_ho parameter enables or disables incoming handovers based onwhether or not the cell is barred.

The erc_ta_priority parameter specifies the priority threshold for extended range cellneighbour. If the absolute timing advance is greater than the priority threshold, the ERCneighbours are placed at the top of the list of sorted handover candidates. Otherwise,the ERC neighbours are appended to the end of the list of candidates.

The ext_range_cell parameter enables or disables the Extended Range Cell feature at aCell.

The extended_paging_active parameter enables or disables extended paging.When enabled, the BTS sends pages to an MS in its extended page group when allpages could not be transmitted in the designated page group for the MS. The MS mustreceive and analyze messages for its paging group and the group two paging blockslater.When disabled, extended page is not allowed.

The frequency_type parameter specifies the frequency type of a cell.

The full_pwr_rfloss parameter enables or disables the ability of the BSS power control tofully power up the MS and BTS at the point where the RF connection appears to be lost.When enabled, the transition to full power occurs when the threshold set bylink_about_to_fail is reached in the link_fail procedure.

The gclk_qwarm_flag parameter specifies the amount of time required by the activeGCLK to warm up. It has no effect on the standby GCLK. If this parameter is disabled, the active GCLK with hardware revision 9 or greaterwill require 15 minutes to warm up, while older GCLKs will require 30 minutes. If this parameter is enabled, the software overrides the hardware timer on theactive GCLK and brings it into service after 15 minutes using the Fast GCLKWarmup feature. This 15 minute period begins when the site is initialized.This parameter is only valid for GCLK boards.

The global_reset_repetitions parameter allows the “Reset” message to be sentindefinitely if Reset Ack is not received, or stops sending the “Reset” message after afixed number of repetitions. The global reset procedure repeats is only if the MSC fails toacknowledge the BSS. After the fixed number of repetitions, an alarm is generated.If the value is set to 0, the global reset message repeats continuously until a Reset Ack isreceived.If the value is set to a value greater than 0, the global reset message repeats the numberof times entered and the alarm: No MSC Acknowledgement for Global Reset isgenerated.

The gproc_slots parameter specifies the number of timeslots to be allocated to allGPROCs for the TDM highway. It is possible to configure different functions on each ofthe 32 channels. The system supports 16 or 32 timeslots for assignment to the TDMhighway.This parameter is not allowed at Horizonoffice BTS sites. 32 timeslots are automaticallyassigned to the TDM highway for Horizonoffice sites.This parameter is not allowed at M-Cell sites.

The gprs_bs_cv_max specifies the maximum count down value a mobile can use foruplink RLC data transfer. The MS sends a count down value in each uplink RLC datablock starting gprs_bs_cv_max blocks from the last block. The value sent isdecremented by one in each subsequent block. This allows the network to identify thelast RLC block in the uplink TBF.

The gprs_dl_pwr_mode parameter specifies the downlink power control mode that thePCU uses to broadcast data blocks to the MS.

The gprs_drx_timer_max parameter specifies the maximum timer value allowed for theMS to request for non–DRX mode after packet transfer mode.

The gprs_enabled parameter specifies whether or not GPRS is unrestricted at a cell.The gprs_supported broadcast parameter describes the GPRS configuration of a cell.The BSS implements this as two cell elements: gprs_enabled and pcch_alloc.

The gprs_intraho_allwd parameter specifies whether or not the BSS performs intra-cellhandovers to free GPRS timeslots currently in use for circuit traffic. Such handoversrecover PDTCHs which have been switched to TCHs.

The gprs_mac_mode parameter specifies the medium access mode to be used by thePCU. The mode can be either “fixed” or “dynamic”.

The gprs_ms_pan_dec parameter specifies the amount by which to decrement the MScounter n3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks receivedby the MS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented bygprs_ms_pan_inc. n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the presetinternal timer T3182 expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182defines how long the mobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero,then the MS performs an abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSMstandard referred to in this description.

Th gprs_ms_pan_inc parameter specifies the amount by which to increment the MScounter n3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks receivedby the MS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented bygprs_ms_pan_inc. n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the presetinternal timer T3182 expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182defines how long the mobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero,then the MS performs an abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSMstandard referred to in this description.

The gprs_ms_pan_max parameter specifies the maximum value of the MS countern3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks received by theMS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented by gprs_ms_pan_inc.n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the preset internal timer T3182expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182 defines how long themobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero, then the MS performsan abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSM standard referred to in thisdescription.

The gprs_ms_txpwr_max_cch parameter specifies the maximum transmit powerallowed for GPRS MSs.

The gprs_network_operation_mode parameter specifies whether a GPRS is presentbetween the MSC and the SGSN.

The gprs_pb parameter specifies the power reduction used by the BTS on the BCCHblocks.

The gprs_pc_alpha is the system parameter broadcast on the BCCH. It is used as amultiplier of the power offset in power control calculations. The actual multiplying factoris one tenth of the value set in this parameter; that is, if N is the value of this parameter,the multiplying factor is N/10.

The gprs_pc_meas_chan parameter specifies whether the MS measures the receivedpower level on the downlink BCCH or PDCH in order to control the uplink power.

The gprs_reconfig_thresh_idle_tch parameter specifies the number of idle circuitswitched resources on the GPRS carrier that must be exceeded before a switchabletimeslot is reconfigured as a Packet Data Traffic Channel (PDTCH).

The gprs_sig_bvci parameter specifies the BVCI of the signalling source used withGBLs.

The group_block_unblock_allowed parameter allows the operator to make the Ainterface more efficient, by enabling support of the group blocking/unblocking procedure,if MSC supports circuit group block and unblock messages.This parameter is only valid at the BSC (location = 0).If this parameter is enabled, the following ‘group block’ messages are sent to the MSC: Circuit Group Block Circuit Group UnblockIf this parameter is disabled, the following ‘single circuit block’ messages are sent to theMSC: Block Unblock

The gsm_cell_id_format parameter specifies the format of the GSM Cell Identificationsent by the Call Processor (CP) to the switch.

The handover_power_level parameter defines the power control level to be used by anMS during a handover to a different cell.

The handover_required_curr_ch parameter specifies whether or not the optionalmessage element current channel is included in the Handover Required message to theMSC.This parameter should conform to the MSC capabilities.This parameter can only be changed at the BSC.

The handover_required_reject_switch parameter disables or enables the delivery of ahandover required reject message from the MSC to the source BSS in the event that atarget cannot be found for a requested handover.This parameter only applies to the BSC (location = 0). If the handover_required_reject_switch is enabled (set to “1”), the BSS expects toreceive a “handover required reject” message from the switch. Any internal cellsthat are candidates for the handover will not be included in the “HandoverRequired” message. On receipt of the “Handover Required Reject” message theBSS will perform an internal handover if there are valid candidates. If the handover_required_reject_switch is disabled (set to “0”), the BSS will notexpect to receive a “Handover Required Reject” message from the switch and willinclude internal candidates in the “Ho Required” message.

The handover_required_sp_ver_used parameter determines whether the optionalelement speech_version_used can be built into the Handover Required message.

The hdsl_losw_oos parameter specifies the HDSL Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) out ofservice (OOS) alarm period. The system takes the HDSL link out of service if the syncword is not received for the hdsl_losw_oos period.

The hdsl_losw_restore parameter defines the HDSL Loss of Sync Word (LOSW)restoration period. If the sync word is received for the hdsl_losw_restore_period, thesystem restores the HDSL link back into service (INS).

The hdsl_snr_daily parameter defines the HDSL Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) dailyalarm level. If the SNR alarm level drops below the hdsl_snr_daily threshold for anaccumulated period of hdsl_snr_daily_mon_period within a given 24 hour period, adaily alarm is generated.

The hdsl_snr_hourly parameter sets the threshold period for the hourly signal to noiseratio (SNR). If the SNR level drops below the hdsl_snr_hourly threshold for anaccumulated period of hdsl_snr_hourly_mon_period within a given 60 minute period,an hourly alarm is generated.

The hdsl_snr_hourly_period parameter sets the threshold period for the hourly signalto noise ratio (SNR). If the SNR level drops below the hdsl_snr_hourly threshold for anaccumulated period of hdsl_snr_hourly_mon_period within a given 60 seconds period,an hourly alarm is generated.

The hdsl_snr_oos parameter specifies the SNR threshold level for the HDSL Signal toNoise Ratio (SNR). The SNL level is continuously monitored by the system. If the SNRlevel drops below the hdsl_snr_oos threshold for more than hdsl_oos_mon_period,the HDSL link is taken Out Of Service (OOS).

The hdsl_snr_restore parameter specifies the SNR threshold level for the HDSL Signalto Noise Ratio (SNR). The SNL level is continuously monitored by the system. If theSNR level rises above the hdsl_snr_restore threshold for more thanhdsl_oos_mon_period, the HDSL link is restored to service.

The ho_exist_congest parameter specifies how to handle existing calls on a TCH whenan MS needs a TCH and none are available in that cell.The options are: (a) to attempt to handover as many calls as the number of queuedassignment requests, (b) to attempt to handover as many calls as meet the congestionhandover criteria, and (c) no handover attempts (for this condition).This parameter will be copied if the copy_cell command is used.

The ho_margin_def parameter sets the default value for the neighbour handover margin(ho_margin_cell) attribute of the source cell. The neighbour handover margin is set usingthe add_neighbor command and changed using the modify_neighbor command.The handover margin is the amount by which the neighbouring cell received signalstrength must exceed the source cell received signal to request a handover.In the context of the power budget process, the following equation must be true: IfPBGT(n) > ho_margin(n) then a handover may be required.

The ho_margin_type5 parameter sets the power budget type 5 handover margin.

The ho_margin_usage_flag parameter determines which sorting algorithm the systemuses to sort the neighbour list. If ho_margin_usage_flag is disabled, handover candidates are always sortedusing ho_margin_cell. If ho_margin_usage_flag is enabled:– Handover candidates for RXLEV handovers are sorted usingho_margin_rxlev [n].– Handover candidates for RXQUAL handovers are sorted usingho_margin_rxqual [n].– All other handover causes have neighbours are sorted usingho_margin_cell value.

The ho_only_max_pwr parameter specifies whether the MS or the BTS must be at fullpower before an rxlev or rxqual handover can take place.If this option is enabled: The MS must be at full power for an uplink handover. The BTS must be at full power for a downlink handover.If ho_only_max_pwr is enabled, the system also removes all candidates for interferencehandovers until the mobile/base is at full power.

The ho_pwr_level_inner parameter specifies the handover power level for the innerzone of a Dual Band cell. The valid range for this parameter depends on the frequencyof the inner zone.

The hop_count parameter, combined with the hop_count_timer parameter, limits thenumber of intracell interference handovers for a call.The hop_count parameter sets the number of handovers. If the number of handoversdefined by the hop_count parameter occur within the time set by the hop_count_timer,the system escalates the handover to a RXQUAL handover to another cell.

The hop_qual_enabled parameter enables or disables the use of specific rxqualthresholds for hopping call handovers.Trials have shown that non-hopping calls can show poor quality of service when thereported rxqual value is around 5, whereas hopping calls can provide the same quality ofservice with the reported rxqual value at 6 or 7.If hop_qual_enabled is enabled and a hopping call is in progress, the system uses therxqual values set with the chg_cell_element command (see Syntax below).If hop_qual_enabled is disabled, the normal rxqual values set with the add_cellcommand are used.

The hopping_support parameter defines the frequency hopping in a cell. Two methodsof achieving frequency hopping are available.

The hopping_systems_enabled parameter enables or disables a frequency hoppingsystem.An index number (fhi) is required. The frequency hopping indicator (fhi) value specifieswhich hopping system is affected. The range of values, entered as <index> is 0 – 3.

The hopping_systems_hsn parameter specifies the hopping sequence (generator)number (HSN) to be used by the frequency hopping system. HSN is one of sevenparameters that defines a particular physical channel in a BTS.

The hopping_systems_mobile_alloc parameter allocates the Absolute RadioFrequency Channel Number (ARFCN) frequencies for hopping (either baseband hoppingor synthesizer hopping).

The illegal_circuit_id parameter is used as an identifier to describe a circuit that isnever used. This parameter is used as an internal place holder in call processing toshow that no circuit has been assigned to a call. The value may be changed to permit acustomer to specify the circuit ID to be used as the illegal_circuit_id. If the value is notchanged, a Motorola specified illegal_circuit_id is assigned.

The immediate_assign_mode parameter specifies how the system responds when noStandalone Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCHs) are available. This parameter alsodetermines the type of channel that is assigned to immediate channel requests foremergency calls.If this parameter is set to disabled, immediate channel requests are either rejected ordiscarded if there is no SDCCH available for both normal and emergency calls.If this parameter is enabled, idle TCH is searched and allocated for immediate channelrequests after all SDCCHs are busy for normal calls. For emergency calls, a TCH isallocated if one is idle. If all TCHs are busy, an SDCCH is allocated for the emergencycall.If this parameter is set to 1, TSCs are allocated for any reason.If this parameter is set to 2, TSCs are not allocated for a location update.

The inner_zone_alg parameter specifies the use algorithm and the associatedparameters for the inner zone of the cell.

The intave parameter specifies the algorithm data needed for performing interferenceband averaging and classification during idle channel interference processing.

The inter_cell_handover_allowed parameter specifies how internal and externalintercell handovers are managed at the BSC.Internal intercell handovers are defined as handovers between cells in the same BSS.External intercell handovers are defined as handovers between cells in different BSSs.

whose limit 0 to X5 is adjusted by Operations and Maintenance (O & M).

The interband_ho_allowed parameter specifies the handover frequencies for a cell.

The interfer_ho_allowed parameter disables or enables handovers due to interference.If this parameter is disabled, interference causes an intercell RXQUAL handover insteadof an intracell handover.

This parameter disables or enables intracell handovers under two conditions: to begin thehandover or to begin the handover when co-channel interference is suspected. Intracellhandovers are defined as handovers within the same cell.BSS support is optional. If the BSS does not support an internal intracell handover, it isinitiated by sending a Handover Required message.

The ksw_config parameter specifies the order in which the timeslots are borrowed fromneighbouring cages. Each KSW pair provides 1024 timeslots. When there are no moretimeslots available, the system borrows timeslots from neighbouring cages.

The l_rxlev_dl_h parameter specifies the handover thresholds for the lower Receive(Rx) level downlink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handover conditionexists.

The l_rxlev_dl_p parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signal strength ofthe serving cell. This threshold is checked to determine if BTS power should beincreased.

The l_rxlev_ul_h parameter specifies the handover threshold for the lower Receive (Rx)level uplink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handover condition exists.

The l_rxlev_ul_p parameter specifies the lower uplink limit for the signal strength of themobile. This threshold is checked to determine if MS power should be increased.

The l_rxqual_dl_h parameter specifies the handover control threshold for the lowerReceived (Rx) quality downlink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handovercondition exists.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_h_data parameter specifies the handover control threshold for thelower Received (Rx) quality downlink, for data transmissions only (for examplemodem-to-modem calls). This threshold is checked to determine if a handover conditionexists. This threshold is enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, byuse of the data_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In thissituation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_h threshold value, as set in the add_cellcommand.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_h_hopping parameter specifies the handover control threshold for thelower Received (Rx) quality downlink, for hopping calls only. This threshold is checked todetermine if a handover condition exists. This threshold is enabled and set to be usedfor hopping calls, by use of the hop_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_elementcommand. In this situation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_h threshold value, asset in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_p parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signal quality ofthe serving cell. This threshold is checked to determine if BTS power should beincreased.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_p_data parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signalquality of the serving cell, for data transmissions only (for example modem-to-modemcalls). This threshold is checked to determine if BTS power should be increased. Thisthreshold is enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, by use of thedata_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In this situation it isused instead of the l_rxqual_dl_p threshold value, as set in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_p_hopping parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signalquality of the serving cell, for hopping calls only. This threshold is checked to determineif BTS power should be increased. This threshold is enabled and set to be used forhopping calls, by use of the hop_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_elementcommand. In this situation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_p threshold value, asset in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_h parameter specifies the handover control threshold for the receive(Rx) quality uplink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handover condition exists.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_h_data parameter specifies the handover control threshold for thelower Received (Rx) quality uplink, for data transmissions only (for examplemodem-to-modem calls). This threshold is checked to determine if a handover conditionexists. This threshold is enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, byuse of the data_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In thissituation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_ul_h threshold value, as set in the add_cellcommand.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_h_hopping parameter specifies the handover control threshold for thelower Received (Rx) quality downlink, for hopping calls only. This threshold is checked todetermine if a handover condition exists. This threshold is enabled and set to be usedfor hopping calls, by use of the hop_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_elementcommand. In this situation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_ul_h threshold value, asset in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.


The l_rxqual_ul_p parameter specifies the lower uplink limit of the signal quality of theMS. This threshold is checked to determine if MS power should be increased.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_p_data parameter specifies the lower uplink limit for the signal qualityof the serving cell, for data transmissions only (for example modem-to-modem calls).This threshold is checked to determine if MS power should be increased. This thresholdis enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, by use of thedata_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In this situation it isused instead of the l_rxqual_ul_p threshold value, as set in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_p_hopping parameter specifies the lower uplink limit for the signalquality of the serving cell, for hopping calls only. This threshold is checked to determineif MS power should be increased. This threshold is enabled and set to be used forhopping calls, by use of the hop_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_elementcommand. In this situation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_p threshold value, asset in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The land_layer1_mode parameter specifies the layer 1 mode of the land networkTELCO connection type. Only the 2.048 Mbit/s – CEPT format is currently supported.All BTS site values are set to the BSC value.This parameter may be set only while in the initial SYSGEN mode. All BTS site valuesare set to BSC (site 0) value when the database is loaded initially.

The layer_number parameter specifies the serving cell as being a macrocell, microcell,or picocell.When an RXQUAL handover condition exists, the system attempts to handover a call inthe microcell layer to another cell in the microcell layer.This parameter specifies the layer for a cell.

The link_about_to_fail parameter specifies the number of undecoded SACCH framesbefore the BSS and MS are increased to full power. The number of SACCH frames iscalculated by subtracting the number of undecoded SACCH frames represented by thevalue entered for this parameter from the number of undecoded SACCH framesrepresented by the link_fail parameter.For example, if link_fail is set to 5 (24 SACCH frames) and link_about_to_fail is set to1 (4 SACCH frames), the BSS and MS is increased to full power when 20 undecodedSACCH frames are received.Full power is specified by the max_tx_bts parameter for the downlink power; andmax_tx_ms or max power capability of the MS for uplink power.This provides a method for improving the quality of a call by increasing the power of thesignal transmitted by the BSS to an MS.

The link_fail parameter specifies the number of lost SACCH multiframes before a loss ofSACCH is reported to Abis.This parameter is also known as the T100_TIMER.The radio link failure criterion is based on the radio link counter S. S is set to the valuespecified for link_fail. If the BSS is unable to decode a SACCH message, the count in Sis decremented by 1. When the BSS successfully decodes a SACCH message, thecount in S is incremented by 2 up to the value of the link_fail parameter.A radio link failure occurs when S equals 0. The BSS continues transmitting on thedownlink until S reaches 0.

The local_maintenance parameter specifies whether or not database elements that canbe configured via the OMC-R interface can be modified from a local maintenanceterminal or from an rlogin. This is used to synchronize the database in the BSS and thedata modelled in the OMC-R MIB.

The low_sig_thresh parameter specifies the minimum receive level for redirectedhandovers. When a call, using a MultiBand MS, is on any cell, and a handover istriggered to a cell with a coincident cell, the handover takes place to the coincident cell, ifthe measured receive level from the target cell exceeds this parameter value.

The lta_alarm_range parameter specifies the alarm range on the allowed Long TermAverage (LTA) variation. Temperature changes can cause the frequency generated bythe VCXO (Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator) to vary. The default range (7) issufficient to compensate for normal day to day variations in temperature. This valueshould not be changed unless it is known that the MMS or uplink clock is faulty.The LTA is a rolling average of the values read from the clock frequency register(CLKFREQ) of each GCLK once every half hour after synchronization if the GCLK isphase locked. Up to 48 clock frequency readings are stored. These stored readings areused to calculate the LTA. An alarm will be generated if 25% or more of the storedreadings differ from the calculated LTA by more than the value that is specified by thelta_alarm_range parameter.The CLKFREQ register is used to maintain the correct frequency generated by theVCXO (Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator). The register centre value is 80h.

The ltu_fw_auto_download parameter specifies if Horizonoffice HDSL modem devicesare to be downloaded automatically with new firmware when it is made available.A warning prompt displays when this parameter is enabled:WARNING: RF Unit MMSs will be cycled if a firmware download is requiredAre you sure (y=yes,n=no)?

The max_ms_dl_buffer parameter specifies the maximum size of the downlink bufferallocated to every MS in the cell.

The max_ms_dl_rate parameter specifies the maximum rate at which the SGSNtransmits downlink data to any MS in the cell.

The max_number_of_sdcchs parameter specifies the maximum number (limit) ofSDCCHs that may be reached with the reconfiguration process. It determines themaximum limit of the SDCCHs that the CRM will maintain.

The max_q_length_full_rate_channel parameter specifies the maximum number ofMSs that may wait in queue for a full rate channel assignment.If an idle traffic channel is not available at the channel assignment instant, the networkmay place the traffic channel request in queue.If the queue length is 0, queuing is not allowed.

The max_q_length_sdcch parameter specifies the maximum length of the queue forStand-alone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH) requests.

The max_retran parameter specifies the maximum channel request retransmission valuefor MSs. After a channel request is initiated, T3120 (timer) begins; if the number ofretransmissions does not exceed the maximum retransmissions received on the BCCH,the channel request message is repeated. The maximum retransmission value may alsobe defined for the cell reselection.

The max_rst_ckt_timer_exps parameter specifies the number of times that the ResetCircuit message is repeated if there is no answer from the MSC.

The max_tx_bts parameter specifies the maximum output power for a BTS within itspower class. This can be used to establish a cell boundary. A BTS is capable ofreducing its power in a range of 21 steps of 2 dBm per step.

The max_tx_ms parameter specifies the maximum MS (Mobile Subscriber) outputpower. Regardless of the power class of the MS, the MS is not told to use a higheroutput power.The value should be chosen to balance the up and down links in a cell.This parameter is also used in the power budget calculation.

The mb_preference parameter enables or disables the Multiband Intercell Handoverfeature.

The mb_tch_congest_thres parameter specifies the level of overall TCH utilization byany MS in a given Cell, at which a MultiBand MS is redirected to the preferred band (asset by band_preference). The parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The missing_rpt parameter enables or disables the suspension of the storing,averaging, and processing of downlink power control and handovers.

The mmi_cell_id_format parameter specifies the format that the MMI command lineaccepts for the GSM Cell Identification number. The formats available are: 4-parameterand 7-parameter.

The mms_cat_enabled parameter enables or disables the MMS Critical AlarmThreshold (CAT).When enabled, the MMS CAT triggers if alarm conditions cause the MMS to go in andout of service 10 times within a 10 minute period. The MMS then is taken out of serviceuntil a lock-unlock is performed. When the MMS is returned to service, the MMS CATmessage displays.When disabled, the MMS remains in service even if the MMS CAT is met or exceeded.

The mms_config_type parameter specifies the signalling type for all MMSs. Thesignalling type depends on the carrier type being used, E1 or T1. This value may not bechanged after the database is initially loaded.The parameter may only be set while in the initial SYSGEN ON mode. All BTS site orPCU values are set to the value assigned to the BSC (site 0) or PCU (pcu) when thedatabase is initially loaded.

The ms_distance_allowed parameter disables or enables the distance comparisonprocess for handovers.When enabled, the distance comparison process might cause a handover if the distancebetween the MS and the BSS is greater than the ms_max_range. If this parameter isenabled, the value chosen for ms_max_range needs careful optimization.

The ms_max_range parameter specifies the MS maximum range for the handoveralgorithm.This parameter must be programmed in terms of timing advance bits. The followingequation shows the relationship between distance and timing advance:(timing advance)(bit period)(propagation velocity) = 2 (distance from MS to BSS)Value 0 corresponds to no timing advance. Values 1 to 63 represent the bit periods thatthe MS transmission (to the BSS) are delayed.If The Extended Range Feature is unrestricted and Extended Range is enabled in thecell, the maximum value of ms_max_range increases to 219.

The ms_p_con_ack parameter specifies the time for which power control can beresumed if power change acknowledgement is not received from the MS. Thisparameter is effective only if the decision_alg_num equals 1.

The ms_p_con_interval parameter specifies the minimum amount of time in multiples oftwo SACCH multiframes between successive RF power change orders to the MS.This value depends on the value for the decision_alg_num parameter. If decision_alg_num = 1, then the recommended value for ms_p_con_intervalequals hreqave divided by 2 (hreqave/2). If decision_alg_num = 0, then the minimum recommended value forms_p_con_interval equals 2 plus hreqave divided by 2 (2+hreqave/2).

The ms_power_control_allowed parameter enables or disables MS power control.Enabling this feature helps to reduce interference.

The ms_power_offset parameter specifies the power offset value sent out in the BCCHsystem information which will utilize the additional power capabilities of a class 3DCS1800 MS that is accessing on the RACH. The value is a positive power offset fromthe value set by ms_txpwr_max_cch.

The ms_txpwr_max_cch parameter specifies the maximum random access poweravailable for a MS on a control channel (ccch) in a cell. This parameter is expressed asa power level value.Before accessing a cell on the RACH and before receiving the first power commandduring a communication on a DCCH (or TCH), the MS uses one of two possible powerlevels.The MS uses the lower power level of the two available: either the ms_txpwr_max_cchbroadcast on the BCCH or the maximum transmit power as defined by the power class ofthe MS.

The ms_txpwr_max_cell parameter specifies the maximum MS transmit power in eachneighbour cell.

The ms_txpwr_max_def parameter specifies the default value for thems_txpwr_max_cell parameter.

The ms_txpwr_max_inner parameter specifies the maximum power an MS can use inthe inner zone of a concentric cell.

The msc_preference parameter specifies A interface messaging if an external handoveris needed during an assignment procedure. This parameter should align with the MSCimplementation which may depend on whether queueing is enabled in the cell. Thecause value sent to the MSC can be set according to whether directed retry is supportedby the MSC.

The msc_qt parameter specifies a defined idle bit pattern for use by the Transcoder RateAdaption Unit (TRAU) and the MSC.The idle pattern is defined in the GSM specification (see References below) as:The idle pattern must be transmitted on every timeslot that is not assigned to achannel, and on every timeslot of a channel that is not allocated to a call. The idlepattern should be 01010100.The binary pattern 01010100 corresponds to decimal 84 which is the default value of thisparameter.This parameter must correspond to the MSC value for an idle PCM sample on the Ainterface. When the XCDR receives this value from the MSC in all PCM samples in its20 ms frame, it outputs a TRAU idle speech frame. In the uplink, this parameter sets thevalue of PCM that the XCDR outputs to the MSC before the XCDR has achieved TRAUsync with the CCU in the DRI.Once this value has been set to match the MSC idle pattern, it does not require anyfurther changes.

The mspwr_alg parameter enables or disables the enhanced power control algorithm.The enhanced power control algorithm is used to prevent oscillation for MS power controlwhere power is reduced for RXQUAL reasons and subsequently increased for RXLEVreasons.

The mtl_loadshare_granularity parameter sets the loadshare granularity across MTLlinks.

The multiband_reporting parameter specifies the number of cells of each supportedband the system includes in the MS Measurement Report.

The n_avg_i parameter specifies the number of signal strength measurements that mustbe made for each filtered interference signal strength sample. NAVG_I is the number ofradio blocks that the signal strength is computed on over a period of TAVG_I.

The ncc_of_plmn_allowed parameter is a bit mapped value which specifies whichNetwork Colour Codes (NCCs) are allowed on specific broadcast control channels(BCCH carriers).

The neighbor_journal parameter enables or disables neighbour journaling.If journaling is enabled: There is no warm up period for neighbours. All neighbor information is paddedwith 0’s. Averaging and power budget calculations will begin immediately. If a previously reported neighbor is missing in the measurement report, a 0 rxlev isused for the neighbor.If journaling is disabled: There is a warmup period of the surround cell hreqave before power budgetcalculations begin. The last received rxlev for the unreported neighbor is used.

The ni parameter specifies the Network Indicator (NI) that establishes a method ofdifferentiation between international and national messages.

The ns_alive_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated to establish ifa NSVC is alive.

The ns_block_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated to block aNSVC.

The ns_unblock_retires parameter specifies the number of retries generated to unblocka NSVC.

The nsei parameter specifies the Network Service Entity Identifier (NSEI) used by theBSS over the Gb interface. There can be only one NSEI associated with each BSS.

The num_audit_retries parameter specifies the number of times CP processes auditeach other with regard to a particular connection. If an audit fails, it repeats up to thevalue specified by num_audit_retries, before a particular call is cleared by the auditingprocess.This parameter provides a means of differentiating between glitches on a link and acomplete link failure.

The num_emerg_access parameter enables or disables the collection of statistics inrelation to the number of active TCH calls terminated to allow an emergency call to takethe specified GSM Cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

The num_emerg_rejected parameter enables or disables the collection of statistics inrelation to the number of emergency calls rejected because of a lack of resources for theselected GSM Cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

The num_emerg_tch_kill parameter enables or disables the collection of statistics inrelation to the number of active TCH calls terminated to allow an emergency call to thechannel on the specified GSM cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

The num_emerg_term_sdcch parameter enables or disables the collection of statisticsin relation to the number of emergency calls that are terminated after being allocated aSDCCH but could not be allocated a TCH for the specified GSM cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

The num_gbl_dl_thrput_samples parameter specifies the number of samples used tocompute the gbl_dl_data_thrput statistic.

The num_gbl_ul_thrput_samples parameter specifies the the number of samples usedto compute the gbl_ul_data_thrput statistic.

The number_of_preferred_cells parameter specifies the maximum number of targetcells to be included in a Handover Required message.The preferred list of target cells is a mandatory BSS field. The number of preferred cellsis given in order of predicted best performance.

The number_sdcchs_preferred parameter specifies the preferred number ofStandalone Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCHs) that the reconfiguration algorithmtries to maintain.When channel reconfiguration is enabled, the CRM attempts to maintain the preferrednumber of SDCCHs for Immediate Assignments.The reconfiguration either of consist idle TCHs being converted to SDCCHs or freeSDCCHs being converted to TCHs.

The opc parameter specifies the Originating Point Code (OPC). The values for the OPCare stored as a 14-bit binary code.If the opc parameter is set to equal the dpc, the system issues a warning:COMMAND ACCEPTED: WARNING: When opc equals dpc, communication with MSC isimpossible.

The option_alg_a5_1 parameter enables or disables the encryption algorithm A5/1.







The option_emergency_preempt parameter enables or disables the emergency callpreemption option. The emergency call preemption feature enables the BSS to provideaccess for emergency calls regardless of other traffic currently on the BSS. Anemergency call is identified in the RACH burst from the MS.

The outer_zone_usage_level parameter specifies the percentage level of outer celltraffic channel (TCH) usage. If this parameter is set to 0, channels in the inner zone is used whenever an MS isqualified to use those resources. If this parameter is set to any other value, the inner zone resources are allocatedonly when an MS is qualified and at least the specified percentage of outer zoneTCHs is in use.

The override_intra_bss_pre_transfer parameter specifies whether or not a pre-transferrequest is sent to SM (Switch Manager) when the handover allocation message isreceived during an inter-cell handover.This parameter only applies to intra-BSS inter-cell handovers.Call processing sends the pre-transfer request to the switch manager, to make aconnection in the downlink direction from the active CIC to the new radio channel at thetime of the new radio channel assignment. This puts voice traffic on the new radiochannel that the mobile is being handed off to earlier than when the pre-transfer functionis disabled.This parameter also determines which method of audio connection is used for the BTSconcentration resource optimization for the handovers feature.

The override_speech_version parameter specifies a speech version when multiplespeech versions are included in a Handover Request or Assignment message from theMSC. The choices are: The first speech version that is supported by the BSS from the list of speechversions provided by the MSC. The Full Rate speech version by preference. The Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) by preference.

The pcr_enable parameter enables or disables the PCR error correction method. Thismethod is used when transferring messages between the MSC and the BSC (via the Ainterface).If PCR is enabled, then: ss7_l2_t7 > 800 milliseconds. ss7_l3_t2 > 1400 milliseconds.

The pcr_n1 parameter specifies the maximum number of message units to be retainedfor retransmission for the PCR Error Correction method.

The pcr_n2 parameter specifies the maximum number of message unit octets to beretained for retransmission for the PCR Error Correction method.

The phase2_classmark_allowed parameter defines the format of the classmarkparameter sent to the MSC based on GSM phases.

The phase2_resource_ind_allowed parameter specifies the GSM Phase format theBSS uses to send Resource Request messages to the MSC.If this parameter is set to 0, the BSS sends the messages in the GSM Phase 1 format.If this parameter is set to 1, the BSS sends the messages in the GSM Phase 2 format.

The phase_lock_gclk parameter enables or disables phase locking for the GCLK boardat a site.Phase locking means the GCLK board is synchronized with the clock of the MMSselected as determined by the mms_priority value. The mms_priority value is specifiedusing the modify_value command.

The pool_gproc_preemption parameter specifies what type of preemption to use forpool GPROCs.When a pool GPROC running a function goes OOS and there are no available poolGPROCs, the INS pool GPROCs can be searched for a lower priority function. If such afunction is found, it is “bumped” from its GPROC by the higher priority function.

The poor_initial_assignment parameter enables or disables checking the timingadvance on a Random Access Channel (RACH). If the RACH is too far away, thisindicates that there has been a poor initial assignment, and therefore the RACH isdiscarded.If this feature is enabled, the ms_max_range parameter must be carefully optimized.

The pow_inc_step_size_dl parameter specifies the step sizes for power increases fromthe BTS to the MS.

The pow_inc_step_size_ul parameter specifies the step size increases from the MS tothe BTS.

The pow_red_step_size_dl parameter specifies the step size for power decreases fromthe BTS to the MS.

The pow_red_step_size_ul parameter specifies the step size for power decreases fromthe MS to the BTS.

The prioritize_microcell parameter specifies whether or not the level (micro or macro)of the serving cell impacts the sorting of the candidate list.If prioritize_microcell is set to 0, the level of the service cell does not impact sorting ofthe candidate list.if prioritize_microcell is set to 1, the level of the serving cell impacts the sorting of thecandidate list.

The protect_last_ts parameter specifies the switchability of PDTCH when there is one(and only one) switchable PDTCH on a carrier and none are reserved.When protect_last_ts is set to 1, the PDTCH may not be allocated to a voice call unlessthere is no data flowing or queued for that timeslot.When protect_last_ts is set to 0, there is no restriction and the last remaining switchablePDTCH can be taken for a voice call.

The pwr_handover_allowed parameter enables or disables the power budgetassessment for handovers.When enabled, a handover to cell “n” might be required if: PBGT(n) – ho_margin(n) > 0.This comparison ensures that the MS is always linked to the cell with the minimum pathloss even though the quality and level thresholds may not have been exceeded.

The pwrc parameter specifies whether or not the Broadcast Control Channels (BCCH)measurement are included in the averaged value of hopping frequencies.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of MSs that may wait in a queue forchannel assignment. A value of 0 indicates that queueing is not allowed.

The ra_colour parameter specifies the routing area colour used in System Informationmessages for a specific cell and, therefore, indicates that GPRS is supported in the cell.

The rac parameter specifies the routing area code (RAC) which is part of the cellidentifier for GPRS cells.

The rach_load_period parameter specifies the number of TDMA multiframes betweensuccessive calculations of the RACH load during the non-overload conditions.

The rach_load_threshold parameter specifies the threshold for RACH load. If thecalculated RACH load exceeds this threshold, an overload condition is signalled and anaccess class is barred at the cell where the overload is occurring.If the RACH load exceeds rach_load_threshold, an overload indication is sent to CallProcessing which may result in an access class being barred. The RACH load may be

The rach_load_type parameter specifies the RACH loading calculation method.

The radio_link_timeout parameter specifies the threshold (limit) for the radio downlinkfailure on the Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH). The channel should only beheld for as long as a user could reasonably be expected to hold while experiencing lossof audio.

This parameter enables or disables the rapid power down procedure. The rapid powerdown procedure bypasses the pow_red_step_size values set in the database in aneffort to bring the power of the MS to an acceptable level quickly.Detected MS power levels are averaged over the number of SACCH periods specified bythe rpd_period parameter. This average is compared to the value specified for therpd_trigger value. The rapid power down procedure will be initiated when the calculatedvalue is greater than the value specified for the rpd_trigger parameter.

The rci_error_clr_threshold parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI)error count clearing threshold at the BSC. When the error count reaches or falls belowthis threshold the alarm clears.

The rci_error_decrement parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI) errordecrement value. The system updates the RCI error count by this value whenever asuccessful call is made.For example, if rci_error_decrement is set to 2. each successful call decreases theerror count by two, so that two successful calls would decrease the count by 4.

The rci_error_gen_threshold parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI)error count threshold at the BSC. When this threshold is reached or exceeded an alarmgenerates.Once this threshold is reached, further RCI errors do not increase the RCI error count. Ifthe error count threshold is exceeded, the error count resets to the error count thresholdvalue.

The rci_error_increment parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI) errorincrement value. The system will update the RCI error count by this value whenever anerror is detected.For example, if rci_error_increment is set to 2. each detected error increases the errorcount by two, so that two errors are counted as 4.

The red_loss_daily parameter specifies the synchronization loss, daily alarm level counton a T1 link. An alarm generates if the synchronization loss meets or exceeds thethreshold in a given 24 hour period.

The red_loss_hourly parameter specifies the synchronization loss, daily alarm levelcount on a T1 link. An alarm generates if the synchronization loss meets or exceeds thethreshold in a given 60 minute period.

The red_loss_oos parameter specifies the synchronization loss, Out Of Service (OOS)daily alarm level count for a T1 circuit. The T1 circuit is be taken OOS if thesynchronization loss meets or exceeds this threshold during a given 24 hour period.

The red_loss_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss, restorable time limitfor a T1 circuit. If a synchronization loss error does not occur within this period of time,the T1 circuit is brought back in service. The synchronization loss is controlled by thevalue assigned to the red_loss_oos parameter.

The red_time_oos parameter specifies the synchronization loss time for a T1 circuit. Ifsynchronization is lost for this period of time, the T1 circuit is taken Out Of Service(OOS).

The red_time_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss restart time for a T1link. If synchronization loss does not occur within this period of time, the T1 link returnsto service.

The reestablish_allowed parameter enables or disables call establishment.If a BTS detects that an MS has not sent up any measurement reports for n number ofSACCH periods (where n is defined by the parameter radio_link_timeout), a radio linkfailure occurs.When enabled, the MS executes the GSM call reestablishment algorithm to determinewhich cell to use for the attempt to reestablish the call.

The rel_tim_adv parameter is the relative timing advance value used in HDPC averagingprocessing.The chg_act_alg_data rel_tim_adv command is used to modify the value of thisparameter.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rel_tim_adv command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The remote_loss_daily parameter specifies the threshold for the daily count of remotealarms.An alarm generates if this threshold is met or exceeded during a 24 hour period.

The remote_loss_hourly parameter specifies the threshold for the hourly count ofremote alarms.An alarm generates if this threshold is met or exceeded during a 60 minute period.

The remote_loss_oos parameter specifies the Out of Service (OOS) threshold for theremote alarmWhen this threshold is met or exceeded, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken OOS.

The remote_loss_restore parameter specifies the wait time for restoring the 2 Mbit/scircuit to service.If no remote alarm indication errors are detected during this wait time, the 2 Mbit/s circuitreturns to service.

The remote_time_oos parameter specifies the remote alarm time period. If a remotealarm exists for this amount of time, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken Out Of Service (OOS).

The remote_time_restore parameter sets the remote alarm restorable time. If theremote alarm ceases for this period of time, the 2 Mbit/s circuit returns to service.

The report_resource_tch_f_high_water_mark parameter specifies the high needthreshold of a full rate traffic channel (TCH) for the resource indication procedure. Whenthe number of available (idle) full rate TCHs falls below this threshold, the internalresource indication timer starts and the resource indication message is sent to the MSC.That is, the Resource Request message received from the MSC is indicating aspontaneous mode.

The report_resource_tch_f_low_water_mark parameter specifies the low needthreshold of a full rate traffic channel (TCH) for the resource indication procedure. Whenthe number of available (idle) full rate TCHs rises above this threshold, the internalresource indication timer stops (if it is running). That is, the Resource Request messagereceived from the MSC is indicating a spontaneous mode.

The rf_res_ind_period parameter specifies the RF resource indication period. Duringthis period, the idle channel is categorized. The idle channel categories are reported tothe CRM by the RSS. The idle channel categories are: X1, X2, X3, X4, and X5.

The rpd_offset parameter specifies the offset value used when calculating the receiveuplink level for an MS when the rapid power down procedure initiates.The receive uplink level is equal to rpd_trigger minus rpd_offset.

The rpd_period parameter specifies the number of SACCH frames used to calculate arolling average of uplink rxlev values.Detected MS power levels are averaged over the number of SACCH periods specified bythe rpd_period parameter. This average is compared to the value specified for therpd_trigger value. The rapid power down procedure initiates when the calculated valueis greater than the value specified for the rpd_trigger parameter.

The rpd_trigger parameter specifies the threshold used to initiate the rapid power downprocedure.Detected MS power levels are averaged over the number of SACCH periods specified bythe rpd_period parameter. This average is compared to the value specified for therpd_trigger value. The rapid power down procedure initiates when the calculated valueis greater than the value specified for the rpd_trigger parameter.The receive uplink power level is equal to rpd_trigger minus rpd_offset.

The rpt_bad_qual_no_mr parameter specifies whether or not the uplink quality value of7 is allowed in a missing measurement report.When rpt_bad_qual_no_mr is set to 0, the worst quality value, 7, is not used to signifythe quality if the measurement report does not arrive.When rpt_bad_qual_no_mr is set to 1, the worst quality value, 7, is used to signify thequality if the measurement report does not arrive.The OMC-R is able to display and change rpt_bad_qual_no_mr over the BSS–OMC-Rinterface. This attribute is not required during cell creation.

The rtf_path_enable parameter enables or disables the RTF Fault Containment feature.

The rxlev_access_min parameter specifies the minimum received signal level (dBm)required for an MS to access the system.The range –110 dBm to –47 dBm is used to set the minimum received signal level whichin turn is used in path loss criterion parameter, C1. This should be set to a valuecorresponding to a signal level at which a call can be maintained in a particularenvironment.

The rxlev_dl_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the downlink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_ho command changes the averaging algorithm data forthe downlink receive level handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxlev_min_def parameter specifies the default value for rxlev_min_cell.

The rxlev_dl_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making power controldecisions with respect to the downlink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_pc command changes the averaging algorithm data forthe downlink receive level power control.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxlev_dl_zone parameter specifies the downlink receive level threshold that must becrossed for a handover to take place between the outer zone and the inner zone.

The rxlev_ul_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the uplink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_ho commands changes the averaging algorithm datafor the uplink receive level handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxlev_ul_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making power controldecisions with respect to the uplink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_pc command changes the averaging algorithm data forthe uplink receive level.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxlev_ul_zone parameter specifies the uplink receive level threshold that must becrossed for a handover to take place between the inner zone and the outer zone.

The rxqual_dl_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the downlink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_ho command changes the averaging algorithm datafor the downlink receive quality handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxqual_dl_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making powercontrol decisions with respect to the downlink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_pc command changes the averaging algorithm datafor the downlink receive quality power control.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxqual_ul_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the uplink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg_data rxqual_ul_ho command changes the averaging algorithm datafor the uplink receive quality handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_ul_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxqual_ul_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making powercontrol decisions with respect to the uplink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg rxqual_ul_pc command changes the averaging algorithm data for theuplink receive quality power control.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_ul_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The sap_audit_type parameter specifies the type of audit to be run on a device at aspecific site.

The sap_device_type parameter specifies the type of device on which an audit runs at aspecific site.

The sap_end_time parameter specifies the ending time for a device audit.When this parameter is displayed using the disp_element command, the time ispresented in military standard time or GMT (such as sap_end_time = 13:45).

The sap_interval parameter specifies the interval for a device audit.When this parameter is displayed using the disp_element command, the time ispresented in military standard time or GMT (such as sap_interval = 13:45).

The sap_start_time parameter specifies the start time for a device audit.When this parameter is displayed using the disp_element command, the time ispresented in military standard time or GMT (such as sap_end_time = 13:45).

The sccp_bssap_mgt parameter enables or disables ITU-TSS SCCP Management.When enabled, the BSS detects Signalling Point Inaccessible and loss of BSSAPsubsystem. The BSS also handles the following messages: User Part Unavailable(UPU), Subsystem prohibited (SSP), Subsystem Allowed (SSA), and Subsystem Test(SST). (Use with Ericsson MSC)When disabled, the BSS always responds to an SST with an SSA message. This flagshould be set only if the MSC does ITU-TSS SCCP Management.All BTS site values are set to the same value assigned to site 0.

The sdcch_ho parameter enables or disables handovers on the SDCCH.When enabled, handovers are not allowed until at least (sdcch_timer_ho * 2)measurement report periods have elapsed.To allow handovers on the SDCCH with a minimum delay, the sdcch_ho parameter mustbe enabled and the sdcch_timer_ho parameter set to its minimum value of 1.

The sdcch_need_high_water_mark parameter specifies the number of idle SDCCHs totrigger reconfiguration of traffic channels to SDCCHs.If dynamic reconfiguration is enabled and the total number of idle SDCCHs is less thanthe value of the sdcch_need_high_water_mark, the CRM tries to reconfigure TCHs inorder to make more SDCCHs. The total number of SDCCHs can not exceed the value ofthe max_number_of_sdcchs parameter.

The sdcch_need_low_water_mark parameter specifies the number of idle SDCCHs totrigger reconfiguration of SDCCHs (from previous TCH to SDCCH reconfigurations) backto TCHs.When dynamic channel reconfiguration is enabled, and when the number of idleSDCCHs available at a point in time goes above this value, reconfiguration of SDCCHsto TCHs is triggered as long as the total number of SDCCHs after reconfiguration wouldstay above the number_sdcchs_preferred value.

The sdcch_tch_band_reassign_delay parameter specifies the number ofmeasurement report periods that the RSS waits before responding to CRM if the MSdoes not report any preferred band neighbour.This parameter applies to multiband MSs only.Use of this parameter may cause a delay in call setup of up to two seconds.

The sdcch_timer_ho parameter specifies the wait time (measured in SACCHmultiframes) before a handover on the SDCCH may occur.

The second_asgnmnt parameter enables or disables the Second Assignmentprocedure. With this parameter enabled, the RRSM initiates a second assignmentprocedure if it receives an assignment failure from the MS for the first assignment. Insituations where first TCH assignment fails and the MS successfully recovers to theSDCCH, this parameter enables a second TCH assignment attempt.

The secondary_freq_type parameter specifies the frequency type of the inner zoneband of a Dual Band cell.

The slip_loss_daily parameter specifies the threshold for the frame slip daily alarmcount. An alarm generates if the count of frame slips meets or exceeds this threshold ina 24 hour period.

The slip_loss_hourly parameter specifies the threshold for the frame slip hourly alarmlevel count. An alarm generated if the count of frame slips exceeds this threshold in a 60minute period.

The slip_loss_oos parameter specifies the threshold for the frame slip out of service(OOS) alarm level count. The 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken out of service if the number offrame slips exceeds this threshold during a 24 hour period.

The slip_loss_restore parameter specifies the frame slip restorable time period. If noerrors occur during this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is brought back into service.

The smg_gb_vers parameter specifies the SMG version being adopted by the BSS overthe Gb interface.

The smg_um_vers parameter specifies the SMG version being adopted by the BSSover the UM interface.

The sms_dl_allowed parameter enables or disables downlink (MS terminated) ShortMessage Service (SMS).

The sms_tch_chan parameter specifies the logical radio channel for the Short MessageService (SMS) transfer in the event of a call being present on a traffic channel. TheFACCH is tried first, and if this fails, the SACCH is used. If the current radio channel isan SDCCH, the SDCCH will be used.

The sms_ul_allowed parameter enables or disables uplink (MS originated) ShortMessage Service (SMS).

The ss7_mode parameter specifies the type of SS#7 for the BSC. This parameterpermits the ITU or ANSI version to be selected.The ITU C7 version is consistent with the GSM specifications. The ANSI version is usedto support PCS1900 applications in the United States.This parameter can only be changed when the user is in SYSGEN ON mode. It can onlybe changed for site 0. All BTS site values are set to the same value assigned to site 0.

The ssm_critical_overload_threshold parameter indicates the usage of call informationblocks, as expressed by the ratio of the number of active calls to the maximum numberof calls the SSM can handle (400). After this threshold has been met or exceeded, noMS originated calls are allowed. The remaining SSM resources are used toaccommodate handover of existing calls. Every time the usage meets or exceeds thisthreshold, two access classes are barred. This number has to be greater than thessm_normal_overload_threshold parameter.

The ssm_normal_overload_threshold parameter indicates the usage of callinformation blocks, as expressed by the ratio of the number of active calls to themaximum number of calls the SSM can handle. Every time the usage equals or exceedsthis threshold, one access class will be barred.

The ssp_burst_delay parameter specifies the length of time between the bursts of data.The number of messages in each burst are specified by the ssp_burst_limit parameter.Statistical information is forwarded from the Site Statistics Process (SSP) to the CentralStatistics Process (CSP) in bursts.



The ssp_burst_limit parameter specifies the number of messages included in eachburst. The length of time between bursts is specified by the ssp_burst_delayparameter.Statistical information is forwarded from the Site Statistical Process (SSP) to the CentralStatistical Process (CSP) in bursts.

The stat_interval parameter sets the time, in minutes, that the statistics file is reportedto the OMC-R.If the operator fails to reset the interval to 30 minutes, the OMC-R calculations of the KeyStatistics and Health Indicators are interrupted for the entire period until the interval isreset.Although any value between 5 and 60 minutes is valid, the OMC-R only parses uploadedstatistics files if this attribute is set to 30 or 60 minutes.

The surround_cell parameter specifies the averaging parameter for a serving cell’sneighbour cells. The system uses this parameter to determine which neighbour cell tohand off to.The chg_act_alg_data surround_cell command is used to modify the value of thisparameter.

The swfm_enable parameter enables or disables Software Fault Management (SWFM)alarm messages to be reported to all local MMI terminals that have alarm reportingenabled.This parameter affects the entire BSS.

The sync_loss_daily parameter specifies the threshold for the synchronization loss dailyalarm level count. An alarm generates if the number of synchronization loss alarmsmeets or exceeds this threshold during a 24 hour period.

The sync_loss_hourly parameter specifies the threshold for the synchronization losshourly alarm level count . An alarm generates if the number of sync loss alarms meets orexceeds this threshold during a 60 minute period.

The sync_loss_oos parameter specifies the threshold for the synchronization loss, OutOf Service (OOS) daily alarm level count. The 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken out of service ifthe number of sync loss alarms meets or exceeds this threshold during a 24 hour period.

The sync_loss_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss restorable timeperiod for a sync_loss_oos_alarm. If a synchronization loss alarm does not occurwithin this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is brought back in service.

The sync_time_oos parameter specifies the synchronization loss time period. Ifsynchronization is lost for this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken Out Of Service (OOS).

The sync_time_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss restorable timeperiod. If synchronization returns for this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is brought back inservice.

The t_avg_t parameter specifies the number of multiframes for C averaging in theTransfer state. (TAVG_W is the number of multiframes for C averaging in the Wait state).

The t_avg_w parameter specifies the number of multiframes for C averaging in the Waitstate. (TAVG_T is the number of multiframes for C averaging in the Transfer state).

The tch_busy_critical_threshold parameter specifies the threshold for initiating theflow control procedure barring two of the access classes 0 to 9 from making calls due toTCH congestion. The two classes that are barred are selected randomly. The flowcontrol procedure initiates when the percentage of busy TCHs is equal to or greater thanthe value entered for this parameter.This parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The tch_busy_norm_threshold parameter specifies the threshold for initiating the flowcontrol procedure to bar a single access class 0 through 9 from making a call due to TCHcongestion. The class that is barred is selected randomly. The flow control procedureinitiates when the percentage of busy TCHs is equal to or greater than the value enteredfor this parameter.This parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The tch_congest_prevent_thres parameter specifies the level of overall TCH utilizationby any MS in a given Cell, at which the Congestion Relief procedure is initiated.This parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The tch_flow_control parameter enable or disables the TCH flow control option.The flow control procedure tries to reduce the load on the system when the TCH usagegoes above thresholds determined by the tch_busy_norm_threshold andtch_busy_critical_threshold parameters. The reduction in traffic is achieved by barringaccess classes and manipulating the tx_integer and max_retran parameters.

The tch_full_need_low_water_mark parameter specifies the low need water mark usedby the Cell Resource Manager (CRM) to determine the need for reconfiguration of fullrate traffic channels (TCHs) to SDCCHs.This parameter specifies the minimum number of TCHs the system attempts to maintainwhen dynamic reconfiguration is enabled.If the total number of idle SDCCHs falls below the value of thesdcch_need_high_water_mark, the CRM tries to reconfigure TCHs in order to makemore SDCCHs. For a TCH to be reconfigured, the number of TCHs must be greaterthan the value of the tch_full_need_low_water_mark parameter.

The temporary_offset parameter specifies a value used by the MS as part of itscalculation of C2 for the cell reselection process described in TSGSM 5.08. It is used toapply a negative offset to C2 for the duration of the penalty_timer parameter.C2 is the reselection priority assigned to a cell which can be broadcast on the BCCH ofeach cell. When more than one cell is available for reselection, the MS reselects the cellwith the highest C2 value.

The threshold parameter specifies the number of times that the Cell Resource Manager(CRM) attempts to assign a Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) number beforerejecting the request.

The timing_advance_period parameter specifies the interval between timing advancechanges.The interval should be greater than or equal to (n8 – p8 + 1) x hreqavex/2.Where: x equals:– 1 (lower threshold of RXLEV),– 2 (upper threshold of RXLEV),– 3 (lower threshold of RXQUAL), or– 4 (upper threshold of RXQUAL). n equals the values assigned for decision_1_ny where y is a value from 1 to 4. p equals the values assigned for decision_1_py where y is a value from 1 to 4. hreqave is the number of measurements from the MS that are used in calculatingone average.

The trace_msgs_after_ho parameter specifies the number of messages that the systemcollects immediately after a handover occurs.

The trace_msgs_before_ho parameter specifies the number of messages that thesystem collects immediately before a handover occurs.

The trunk_critical_threshold parameter specifies the severity assignment of certainalarms. The value of this parameter is a percentage of total trunk capacity.A critical alarm is assigned when the percentage of trunk capacity loss exceeds thetrunk_critical_threshold parameter value. A major alarm is assigned when thepercentage of trunk capacity loss is greater than or equal to the trunk_major_thresholdparameter value but is less than the trunk_critical_threshold parameter value.A trunk_critical_threshold value of 0 insures that Critical is always the severityassignment if there is any capacity loss.

The trunk_major_threshold parameter specifies the severity assignment of certainalarms. The value of this parameter is a percentage of total trunk capacity.A major alarm is assigned when the percentage of trunk capacity loss exceeds thetrunk_major_threshold parameter value but is less than the trunk_critical_thresholdparameter value.A minor alarm is assigned when the percentage of trunk capacity loss is less than thetrunk_major_threshold parameter value.

The ts_alloc_flag parameter alters the E1/T1 timeslot allocation on links that areadjacent to a ts_switch (pseudo site).This parameter is only used when RSL or RTF devices are equipped.Changing this parameter does not alter the timeslot mapping of RSLs and RTFs that arealready equipped; it affects the way timeslots are allocated for subsequently equippeddevices.

The tsc_update_method parameter specifies the method for updating timeslots whenthe BSIC is changed. The available methods are: Update the BCCH/CCCH timeslots. Update all timeslots on the BCCH carrier. Update all timeslots on all carriers of cell.

The tx_integer parameter specifies the number of Random Access Channel (RACH)slots between the access retry transmission on the RACH.Timer T3126 is used when an MS sends a Channel Request message.From 3 to 50 RACH slots are used to spread the transmission.

The tx_power_cap parameter specifies all cells within a site to be either low transmittingpower capable or high transmitting power capable. This parameter is valid only at DCS1800 or PCS1900 sites. This parameter is not valid for micro sites. This parameter can be set when the primary outer zone frequency type f the cell isPGSM, EGSM, DCS1800, or PCS1900 provided that the cell is a Dual Band Cell.If the cell is not, the frequency must be DCS1800 or PCS1900 to changetx_power_cap.

The u_rxlev_dl_ih parameter specifies the intracell control thresholds for the Receive(Rx) level downlink. This parameter is evaluated in conjunction with the l_rxqual_dl_hto determine whether an intercell or intracell is being requested.

The u_rxlev_dl_p parameter specifies the signal strength for the upper downlink limit ofthe serving cell.BTS transmit power may be reduced if the MS signal strength is greater than this value.

The u_rxlev_ul_ih parameter specifies the intra-cell control thresholds for the upperReceive (Rx) level uplink. This parameter is evaluated in conjunction with thel_rxqual_ul_h to determine whether an intercell or intracell is being requested.

This parameter specifies the signal strength for the upper uplink limit of the serving cell.Mobile transmit power may be reduced if the MS transmit signal strength is greater thanthis value.

The u_rxqual_dl_p parameter specifies the power control threshold for the best alloweddownlink receive quality (rxqual). The valid range and default values for this parameterare dependent on the type of unit that is selected.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.An Rxqual value better (lower BER rate) than what is specified by the u_rxqual_ul_pparameter may result the reduction of downlink power.

The u_rxqual_ul_p parameter sets the power control threshold for the best alloweduplink receive quality (rxqual). The valid range and default values for this parameter aredependent on the type of unit that is selected.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.An Rxqual value better (lower BER rate) than what is specified by the u_rxqual_ul_pparameter may result the reduction of MS power.

The ul_audio_lev_offset parameter specifies the uplink volume control offset on a perBSS basis. The offset is in 1 dB steps with a maximum increase or decrease of 30 dB(between –15 dB and 15 dB).Changes take effect immediately (including active calls).The audio level parameters affect background and comfort noise. The audio levelparameters do not affect data.

The ul_rxlev_ho_allowed parameter enables or disables handovers due to uplinkreceive level (rxlev).

This parameter enables or disables handovers due to the uplink receive quality (rxqual).

The unequipped_circuit_allowed parameter specifies the system response when aterrestrial circuit becomes unequipped. The options are: Sending an alarm to the OMC-R. Sending an “unequipped circuit” message to the MSC. Sending both an alarm to the OMC-R and an “unequipped circuit” message to theMSC.

The use_derived_ho_power parameter specifies how the system manages the derivedhandover power level for internal intercell handovers.When disabled, these handovers use the power level in the database.When enabled, these handovers use a power level derived from the rxlev reported by theMS for the target cell.

The use_neighbor_pbgt_hreqave parameter indicates whether the per cell or perneighbour hreqave will be used for the pbgt>ho_margin trigger assignment.

The volume_control_type parameter enables or disables uplink and downlink VolumeControl. The volume can be changed at either an RXCDR or at a BSC. The effectdepends on the equipment configuration (GDPs or DRIs equipped), and the value ofvolume_control_type to use DRIs (0) or GDP volume control (1).

The wait_for_reselection parameter specifies the length of time before choosing anMMS for clock extraction after a GCLK has had a CLKX reference failure alarm. If theMMS providing clock extraction is INS after the time period has expired, it is left as theclock extraction source.

The wait_indication_parameters parameter specifies the MS timer (T3122).For an MS origination with no channel available, the MS is sent an IMMEDIATEASSIGNMENT REJECT message in an unacknowledged mode on the CCCH. Themessage contains the request reference and a wait indication. The MS does not make anew request in the same cell until the timer expires.

The worse_neighbor_ho parameter specifies whether or not a call can be handed overto a neighbor cell due to the downlink receive level even when the neighbor cell receivelevel is lower than the serving cell receive level.

The zone_ho_hyst parameter specifies the margin for the inner zone handoverhysteresis. The system uses this value to determine whether an outer-zone toinner-zone handover should take place.A handover initiates when both the uplink and the downlink receive level averages aregreater than the sum of the respective uplink or downlink threshold defined for the innerzone plus the per cell hysteresis for interzone handover plus the difference between thecurrent uplink/downlink transmit power and the maximum uplink/downlink transmit powerof the inner zone carrier:RXLEV_DL > RXLEV_DL_ZONE + ZONE_HO_HYST + (BS_TXPWR –BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)or(RXLEV_UL > RXLEV_UL_ZONE + ZONE_HO_HYST + (MS_TXPWR –MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)).

Valid range

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 255

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 to 6

3 to 6

1 (PGSM),2 (EGSM),

4 (DCS1800),8 (PCS1900)

3 to 6

0 to 127

0 to 7

1 or 2

0 to 2 blocks reserved for ccch_conf = 10 to 7 blocks reserved for ccch_conf 1

0 to 63

0 or 1

1 to 3

0 to 2

1 to 3

1 to 3

0 or 1

1 to 3

0 to 31

0 to 31

0 or 1

0 to 21 (0 to 6 for Horizonoffice sites)

0 or 1

2 to 65535

0 to 100, and 255

0 or 1

0 or 1

120 to 65535

0 to 30

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 255

0 or 1

0 to 255

0, 1, 2, 4, and 6

1 to 1020

0 to ffffh

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 7

0 to 63

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 253

1 to 127

2 to 255

yes or no

0 Disabled1 to 255 CIC error increment value

1 to 255

The GSM Cell ID number

–63 to 63

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 20 Disabled at the cell

1 Use coincident better cell detection2 Use coincident cell redirection and better cell detection

–63 to 63

20 to 100

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 The source cell treats all target cells equally as candidates

for imperative handovers.1 The source cell immediately retries target cells which

werein the process of congestion relief.

0 The system takes no action if the Cell rejects ahandover request.

1 The system invokes Congestion Reliefprocedures if this Cell rejects a handover

request.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 80

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 31

0 to 63

0 or 1

–15 to +15

0 to 3

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 16383 If ss7_mode = 0 (CCITT)0 to 16777215 If ss7_mode =1 (Bellcore)

0 or 1

0 to 2

-63 to 63

0 to 2

0 to 10

0 to 32

0 to 3

Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (including spaces)

0 to 33

0 or 1

0 to 40 Investigate

1 Critical2 Major3 Minor

4 Warning

0 to 63

0 or 10 Disabled1 Enabled


0 to 50 Forced handovers are not allowed.

1 Forced handovers to interference band 1extended resource are allowed.

2 Forced handovers to interference bands 1 to 2extended resource are allowed.






0 to 20 Extended Range disabled for the cell

1 Extended Range is enabled as a boundary cell2 Extended Range is enabled as an isolated cell (rural area)


0 or 1

0 or 1

1 pgsm2 egsm

4 dcs18008 pcs1900

0 to 255

0 to 15

0 to 3

16 or 3216 16 TDM timeslots

32 32 TDM timeslots (only valid with GPROC2 boards).

0 to 20 No power mode

1 Mode A2 Mode B



0 or 10 Fixed mode

1 Dynamic mode

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 31

0 to 16

0 to 10

0 or 1

0 to 5

0 to 65535

0 or 1

0 to 2

1 to 31 Mode 12 Mode 23 Mode 3

2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM 0 to 15 for DCS1800 and PCS1900 29 to 31 for DCS1800 and PCS1900

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 3598

0 to 65534

6 to 44

8 to 44

0 to 3598

6 to 44

6 to 44

0 to 2

63 to +63

63 to +63

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 255

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 to 63

2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM 0 to 15 for DCS1800 and PCS1900 29 to 31 for DCS1800 and PCS1900

0 to 65535

0 to 2

ARFCN depends on the frequency type for thecell.

0 to 3

1 to 31

0 to 3

1 to 11

0 to 63

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 to 3

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 to 1810 BER If alt_qual_proc = 00 to 7 QBand If alt_qual_proc = 1



0 to 1810 BER Ifalt_qual_proc = 0

0 to 7 QBand If alt_qual_proc = 1


0 or 1



0 to 2

0 to 15

0 to 15

0 or 1

0 to 63

1 to 255

0 or 1

1600 to 20000

1 to 900

0 to 48

0 to 50

0 to 50

0 to 3

0 to 100

0 to 21

0 or 1

5 to 39 PGSM and EGSM (Odd values only)0 to 36 DCS1800 (Even values only)

0 to 32,33 PCS1900 (Even values only and value 33)

1 to 101

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 31

0 to 31

0 or 1

0 to 3

0 to 63 0 to 219

(2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM cells) (2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM cells)

(0 to 15, 30, 31 for PCS1900 cells)

5 to 39 (Odd values only) PGSM and EGSM0 to 36 (Even values only) DCS1800

0 to 32, 33 (Even values only and value 33) PCS1900



PGSM/EGSM: 5 to 39 (odd values only)DCS1800: 0 to 36 (even values only)PCS1900 0 to 32 (even values only);

and 33

0 to 7

0 to 255 (representing bit patterns 00000000 to 11111111)

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 3

1 to 15

0 to 255

0 or 1

0 to 3

1 to 10

1 to 3

1 to 3

0 to 65535

0 to 5

offon

1 to 10

1 to 10

1 to 16

0 or 1

offon

offon

offon

4 to 448 to 48

0 to 163830 to 16777215

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 100

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 or 1

32 to 127

950 to 3750

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14

2, 4

2, 4

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 50

0 to 7

0 to 255

1 to 1020

0 to 1000

0 or 1

0 to 15

0 or 1

0 to 253

1 to 127

2 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 or 1

1 to 31

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 254

1 to 255

1 to 127

0 to 63

1 to 32

0 to 63

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 to 63

1 to 31

1 to 31

0 to 63

0 to 63

1 to 31 0 to 255

1 to 31 0 to 255

0 to 63

0 to 2, 255

1 to 31 0 to 255

1 to 31 0 to 255

1 to 31 0 to 255

1 to 31 0 to 255

N/A

0 or 1

0 or 1

1 to 39

Hours 0 to 23Minutes 0 to 59



10 to 48

0 to 4

1 to 31

0 or 1

1,2,4,8

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

24 to 31

29 to 31

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 100

0 to 100

0 to 2500

0 to 100

0 to 2500

1 to 65535

5 to 60

0 to 255

0 or 1

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

0 to 25

0 to 25

81 to 100

0 to 100

1 to 101 (The value 101 indicates there are no resources left

to allocate).

0 or 1

0 to 255

0 to 7

0 to 255

0 to 31

0 to 8

0 to 8

0 to 100

0 to 99

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 to 15

0 or 1

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 to 63


(-15 to 15)

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 2

0 or 1

0 or 1


0 or 1

0 to 86400

0 to 255

0 or 1

0 to 30 or

-60 to 63

Value description

0 Do not use hopping specific thresholds.1 Use hopping specific thresholds.

0 Disables adaptive power budget handovers atthe location.

1 Enables adaptive power budget handovers at thelocation using per cell cumulative area.

2 Enables adaptive power budget handovers at thelocation using per neighbor cumulative area.

0 Disables adaptive receive level handovers at thelocation.

1 Enables adaptive receive level handovers at thelocation.

0 Disables adaptive quality handovers at thelocation.

1 Enables adaptive quality handovers at thelocation.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 BER Units1 Quality band units

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Automatic RF loss tracing disabled forthis cell

1 Automatic RF loss tracing enabled forthis cell; send measurement reports to

MMI and OMC2 Automatic RF loss tracing enabled forthis cell; send measurement reports to

OMC-R only

0 Reinitialization disabled1 Reinitialization enabled

1 (PGSM),2 (EGSM),

4 (DCS1800),8 (PCS1900)

0 The BSS attempts to hand a Multiband MS over to thestrongest neighbour that the MS reported when a handover

is required for normal radio resource reasons.1 The BSS attempts to assign a Multiband MS to the

strongest preferred band neighbour that the MS reported atthe time of SDCCH to TCH assignment.

If the BSS cannot assign a preferred band TCH the BSSwill not try to direct this MS to the preferred band for the lifeof the current call connection. The BSS always hands theMS over to the strongest MS-reported neighbour when ahandover is required for normal radio resource reasons.2 The BSS attempts to hand a Multiband MS over to thestrongest preferred band neighbour that the MS reportedwhen a handover is required for normal radio resource

reasons.The BSS places preferred band neighbours ahead of

non-preferred band neighbours in order to attempt to assigna channel from the preferred band for the MS.3 The BSS attempts to assign a Multiband MS to the

strongest preferred-band neighbour that the MS reported atthe time of SDCCH to TCH assignment, as well as attempt

to hand the MS over to the strongest preferred–bandneighbour that the MS reported when a handover is

required for normal radio resource reasons.This value combines the functions of values 1 and 2.

4 The BSS continually attempts to hand a Multiband MS overto a preferred band TCH immediately after initial

assignment.The BSS will not attempt to allocate a TCH in the preferredband for this MS at the time of SDCCH-to-TCH assignment.

The BSS will enter a mode of continually monitoring forqualified preferred-band neighbours reported by the MS inorder to hand the MS over. The BSS will stay in this modeuntil it finds a neighbour TCH in the preferred band for thecurrent serving cell. Handovers for normal radio resource

reasons may occur during the monitoring mode, and thesehandovers will be to the strongest preferred band neighbour

reported by the MS.5 The BSS attempts to assign a Multiband MS to the

strongest preferred–band neighbour reported by the MS atthe time of SDCCH-to-TCH assignment.

If this assignment is impossible, the BSS enters a mode ofcontinually monitoring for qualified preferred-band

neighbours reported by the MS in order to hand the MSover. The BSS will stay in this mode until it finds a

neighbour TCH in the preferred band. Handovers fornormal radio resource reasons may occur during themonitoring mode, and these handovers will be to the

strongest preferred band neighbour reported by the MS.This value combines the functions of values 1, 2, and 4.

6 The BSS attempts to assign a Multiband MS to thestrongest preferred band neighbour reported by the MS

only after a cell has become congested.If this assignment is not possible, the BSS enters a mode of

continually monitoring for qualified preferred-bandneighbours reported by the MS in order to hand the MS

over. The BSS will stay in this mode until it finds aneighbour TCH in the preferred band. Handovers fornormal radio resource reasons may occur during themonitoring mode, and these handovers will be to the

strongest preferred band neighbour reported by the MS.This type should be used in order to activate the multiband

congestion threshold verification.This value functions identically to value 5, except it is only

triggered when the cell is congested.

Represents the exponent of threshold BER. For example, 3would be the exponent value of 103, indicating 1 bit error in

1000 bits.

The range of values depends on the value of the ccch_confparameter:


Represents the multiframes period for the transmission ofPAGING REQUEST messages to the same paging group.

Value bs_pa_mfrms0 2 multiframes1 3 multiframes2 4 multiframes3 5 multiframes4 6 multiframes5 7 multiframes6 8 multiframes7 9 multiframes

1 Non Abis, only BSP and LCF2 Non Abis, BSP, LCF and OMF

Hex = 00h to 3FhDecimal = 0 to 63

See the tables “Base Station Identity Code HexadecimalValues” and “Base Station Identity Code Decimal Values”

tables.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 No flow control1 XON/XOFF

2 Leaky bucket algorithm

0 First In/First Out packet scheduling1 Earliest Deadline packet scheduling

012...

310 SACCH multiframes2 SACCH multiframes4 SACCH multiframes

.

.

.62 SACCH multiframes


012...


.

.


0 BTS power control disabled1 BTS power control enabled

0 BTP1 BTP and DHP

0 to 30

0 to 255

0 to 100 The percentage of traces reserved forMSC initiated traces on a per LCF basis.255 MSC invoked call traces disabled.

0 Point code is not included1 Point code is included

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Standard interface1 Interface with the repetition rate interpretation

and CBCH loading fields

0 to 255

0, 1, 2, 4, and 6

1 to 1020

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to ffffh

0 Cell is not barred1 Cell is barred

0 Normal priority cell1 Low priority cell

Represents the signal level differences as shown below:0 0 dB1 2 dB2 4 dB3 6 dB4 8 dB

5 10 dB6 12 dB7 14 Db

0 0 dB1 2 dB2 4 dB

.

.

.63 126 dB

0 Do not broadcast cell reselection parameters onthe BCCH of the cell

1 Broadcast cell reselection parameters on theBCCH of the cell

0 to 253

1 to 127

2 to 255

yes or no

0 Disabled1 Enabled


1 to 255

The GSM Cell ID number

–63 to 63

0 Disabled1 Enabled



–63 to 63

20 to 100


0 or 10 The source cell treats all target cells equally as candidates

for imperative handovers.1 The source cell immediately retries target cells which were

in the process of congestion relief.

0 or 10 The system takes no action if the Cell rejects a

handover request.1 The system invokes Congestion Reliefprocedures if this Cell rejects a handover

request.




0 to 80

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 MSC traces are allowed while flow is restricted.1 MSC traces are not allowed while flow is

restricted.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 3

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

1 to 31

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 3

0 to 63

0 Power control algorithm number 11 Power control algorithm number 2 (enables the

use of p_con_ack timers)

–15 to +15

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 DTX enabled for speech / disabled for non-transparent data1 DTX disabled for speech / disabled for non-transparent data2 DTX disabled for speech / enabled for non-transparent data3 DTX enabled for speech / enabled for non-transparent data

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Enabled1 Disabled


0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Ignore the need of a handover until the assignment procedureis complete.

1 Act on the need for a handover during the assignmentprocedure.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

-63 to 63

0 to 10

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Permitted (MS may use DTX)1 Required (MS must use DTX)

2 Disallowed (MS must not use DTX)

0 Disabled1 Enabled (excludes power reduction)2 Enabled (includes power reduction)

0 to 32

Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (including spaces)

0 Disabled across both the A-interface and theAir-interface

1 Enabled on A-interface, disabled on Air-interface2 Disabled on A-interface, enabled on Air-interface

3 Enabled across both the A-interface and theAir-interface

0 to 33

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 40 Investigate


4 Warning

0 to 63












1 Extended Range is enabled as a boundary cell2 Extended Range is enabled as an isolated cell

(rural area)


1 pgsm2 egsm

4 dcs18008 pcs1900



0 to 255

0 to 15

0 to 3


32 32 TDM timeslots (only valid with GPROC2 boards).


1 Mode A2 Mode B



0 or 10 Fixed mode

1 Dynamic mode

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 7

0 to 31


0 Disabled BSS sends only single circuit� �block/unblock messages to the MSC.�

1 Enabled BSS sends only group block/unblock� � �messages to the MSC.

0 Whole Cell Global Identification (CGI)1 Location Area Code (LAC), and Cell Identity (CI)

2 Cell Identity (CI)

0 Not included1 Included

0 Disabled (reject message not required)1 Enabled (reject message required)

0 Disabled (no speech version)1 Enabled (build in speech version)

Represents 3 dB to 22 dB, as shown below:6 = 3 dB

7 = 3.5 dB8 = 4 dB

.

.

.44 = 22 dB


9 = 4.5 dB10 = 5 dB

.

.

.44 = 22 dB

This parameter may only be changed if the HDSLoption is unrestricted.

This parameter may only be changed at anM-Cellcity, Horizonmicro or Horizoncompact site.

Changing this parameter affects all master modemsequipped as msi_type niu_hdsl at the local

M-Cellcity or Horizonmicro site.All slave modem alarm thresholds are identical to the

master modem alarm thresholds.


7 = 3.5 dB8 = 4 dB

.

.

.44 = 22 dB

Represents 3 dB to 22 dB, as shown below:6 3 dB

7 3.5 dB8 4 dB

.

.

.44 22 dB

0 No handover attempts (for this condition)1 Attempt to handover as many calls as the

number of queued assignment requests2 Attempt to handover as many calls as meet the

congestion handover criteria

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

(0 disables intracell interference handovers)

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 No hopping in this cell1 Synthesizer hopping2 Baseband hopping

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Cyclic hopping. The MA is hopped throughlowest to highest magnitudes, and then the cycle

repeats.1 to 63 Random hopping. HSN and MA are entries to

the algorithm table 6 of GSM

S If the cell is PGSM, the range is 1 through124.

S If the cell is EGSM, the range is either: 1 through 124�

975 through 1023 , 0.�S If the cell is DCS1800, the range is 512

through 885.

0 Disabled1 Allocate TSC for any reason

2 Do not allocate TCH for location update

0 = disable inner zone1 = power based use algorithm

The system displays prompts for:S ms_txpwr_max_inner

Valid range: PGSM and EGSM: �

5 to 39 dBm (odd values only; value must be less thanor equal to max_tx_ms)

Default value: max_tx ms DCS1800 and PCS1900: �

0 to 30 dBm (even values only; value must be less thanor equal to max_tx_ms)

Default value: max_tx msS zone_ho_hyst,

Valid range: 0 to 30Default value:0S rxlev_dl_zone

Valid range: 0 to 63Default value: 63S rxlev_ul_zone

Valid range: 0 to 63Default value: 63

2 = interference based use algorithmThe system prompts for:S neighbor_report_timer

Valid range: 0 to 255 SACCH periodsDefault value: 10

3 = The Dual Band Cell Use Algorithm is used. The prompts shownin Table 5-3 are generated and displayed.

1 2 SACCH multiframes2 4 SACCH multiframes

.

.

.31 62 SACCH multiframes

0 Outgoing Inter-cell handover is not enabled. TheHandover Required message is sent to the MSC.

1 Outgoing Inter-cell handover is enabled.2 Outgoing internal intercell handover is disabled.The Handover Required message is not sent to

the MSC.3 Outgoing Inter-cell and external handovers aredisabled and the Handover Required message is

not sent to the MSC.

1 = PGSM2 = EGSM

3 = PGSM and EGSM4 = DCS1800

5 = PGSM and DCS18006 = EGSM and DCS1800

7 = PGSM, EGSM, and DCS18008 = PCS1900

9 = PGSM and PCS190010 = EGSM and PCS1900

11 = PGSM, EGSM, and PCS1900

Represents 110 dBm to 47 dBm, as shown below:� �0 110 dBm�1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..

63 47 dBm�

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Intracell handovers are performed by the BSS.These calls are included as target cells in aHandover Required message to the MSC.

1 The BSS performs Intracell handovers. TheMSC is notified with a Handover Performed

message.2 Intracell handovers are disabled and the

Handover Required message is not sent to theMSC.

Represents 110 dBm to 47 dBm, as shown below:� �0 110 dBm and lower�

1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..

63 47 dBm and higher�


1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..



1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..



1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..


0 to 1810 BER (1 step = 0.01% bit error rate) Ifalt_qual_proc = 0

0 to 7 QBand units If alt_qual_proc = 1







0 2.048 Mbit/s CEPT format (E1)�1 1.544 Mbit/s T1 link�

0 Macrocell1 Microcell2 Picocell

Represents the number of SACCH frames as shown below:0 0 SACCH frames1 4 SACCH frames2 8 SACCH frames

. ..

15 60 SACCH frames

Represents the number of SACCH multiframes as shownbelow:

0 4 SACCH frames1 8 SACCH frames

2 12 SACCH frames. ..

15 64 SACCH frames

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

Valid values depend on the value of ccch_conf.If ccch_conf = 1, the values must be in multiples of 8 with an

offset of 4 (such as 0, 4, 12,...,44).If ccch_conf 1, the values must be in multiples of 8 with

an offset of 0 (such as 0, 8, 16,...48).

0 Maximum [1] retransmission1 Maximum [2] retransmissions2 Maximum [4] retransmissions3 Maximum [7] retransmissions

The value 0 means the system keeps sending the Reset�Circuit message indefinitely.�



0 Disabled1 Enabled

(The value 101 indicates there are no resources leftto allocate).

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 7-parameter format1 4-parameter format

0 Disabled1 Enabled

If land_layer1_mode = 0 (2.048 Mbit/s E1 link) then:0 CRC4�

1 No CRC4�If land_layer1_mode = 1 (1.544 Mbit/s T1 link) then:

0 ESF

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 63 for normal cells0 to 219 for Extended Range cells

0 0 SACCH multiframes1 2 SACCH multiframes2 4 SACCH multiframes

.

.



.

.


0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 0 dB1 2 dB2 4 dB3 6 dB

(2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM cells) (2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM cells) (0 to 15, 30, 31 for PCS1900 cells)






and 33

0 Directed Retry is supported within the BSS, but not acrossthe A-interface.

1 Directed Retry is supported within the BSS. The onlyA-interface impact is the Assignment Complete message,which contains the optional Cell ID if the Cell ID changes

during the assignment.2 The BSS sends the Handover Required message with the

cause directed retry to the MSC.� �3 The BSS sends the Handover Required message with the

cause of the handover to the MSC (for example, BetterCell).

4 The BSS sends an Assignment Failure message with thecause directed retry and then sends a Handover� �

Required message with cause directed retry to the MSC.� �5 The BSS sends an Assignment Failure message with the

cause directed retry and then sends a Handover� �Required message with the cause of the handover to the

MSC (for example, Better Cell).6 The BSS sends a Handover Required message with

cause directed retry and then sends an Assignment� �Failure message with cause directed retry to the MSC.� �

7 The BSS sends a Handover Required message with thecause of the handover (for example, Better Cell) and then

sends an Assignment Failure message with causedirected retry to the MSC.� �

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 16 virtual circuits (regular granularity)1 64 virtual circuits (enhanced granularity)

0 Normal reporting of the six strongest neighbour cells withknown and allowed NCC part of the BSIC, irrespective of the

band used.1 Report the strongest neighbour cell, with known and allowed

NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in theneighbour cell list, excluding the frequency band of the servingcell. The remaining positions in the measurement report shall

be used for reporting Cells in the band of the serving Cell. Anystill remaining positions will be used to report the next

strongest identified neighbours in other bands irrespective ofthe band used.

2 Report the two strongest cells, with known and allowed NCCpart of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the neighbourcell list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Theremaining positions in the measurement report shall be used

for reporting Cells in the band of the serving Cell. Any stillremaining positions will be used to report the next strongestidentified neighbours in other bands irrespective of the band

used.3 Report the three strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC

part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the neighbourcell list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Theremaining positions in the measurement report shall be used


used.

The following table is a representation of the bit mapping of the ncc_of_plmn_allowedparameter. When a bit is set to 1, the corresponding NCC will be allowed. When a bit is

set to 0, the corresponding NCC will not be allowed.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 International Network1 Spare (for international use only)

2 National Network3 Reserved for national use

off Disabledon Enabled




4 to 44 If ccch_conf = 1, the values must be in multiplesof 8 with an offset of 4 (such as 4, 12, 20, ..., 44)


0 to 16383 If ss7_mode = 0 (ITU-TSS)0 to 16777215 If ss7_mode = 1 (ANSI)

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Send pre-transfer request to SM1 Do not send pre-transfer request to SM

0 No override (First supported speech version assupplied by the MSC)

1 Full Rate (GSM speech full rate version 1)2 Enhanced Full Rate (GSM speech full rate

version 2)

1 MS uses servicing channel measurements tocalculte power budget.

0 MS uses reported servicing cell BCCH signalstrength to calculate power budget.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Formatted for Phase 11 Formatted for Phase 2

2 Formatted for Phase 2 with Multiband

0 GSM Phase 1 format1 GSM Phase 2 format

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 No replacement1 Replacement based on function priority

2 Replacement based on function and intrafunctionpriorities

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 No impact on sorting1 Impact on sorting

0 Last timeslot is not protected1 Last timeslot is protected

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Include BCCH measurement1 Do not include BCCH measurement

0 Percentage of RACH opportunities used1 Percentage of total RACHs which are incorrect

(collisions)

Represents the number of SACCH frames as shown below:0 4 SACCH frames1 8 SACCH frames

2 12 SACCH frames. ..

15 64 SACCH frames

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 = disable this feature1 to 255 = rci_error_increment value

0 0 seconds 0 milliseconds1 0.1 seconds 100 milliseconds2 0.2 seconds 200 milliseconds

. 6000 600 600000 milliseconds

.65535 6553.5 seconds 6553500 milliseconds







0 Enabled1 Disabled


. 6000 600 seconds 600000 milliseconds








Each step represents an increase of 1dBm, from 110 dBm to�47 dBm, as shown in the table below:�

0 110 dBm and lower�1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

.

.

.63 47 dBm and higher�

0 Disabled1 Enabled

Represents dBm as shown below:0 110 dBm and lower�

1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..


Each step represents 1 dBm as shown below:0 110 dBm and lower�

1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..





0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled


. ..

31 62 SACCH multiframes

0 Disabled1 Enabled

1 PGSM2 EGSM

4 DCS18008 PCS 1900

0 0 seconds 0 milliseconds1 0.1 second 100 milliseconds



0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 BSS_ALGORITHM1 FACCH always used2 SACCH always used

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 ITU version1 ANSI version

0 Disabled1 Enabled










1 to 101 (The value 101 indicates there are no resources leftto allocate).

0 Disabled1 Enabled

Mapped to SACCH multiframes0 0 SACCH multiframes1 2 SACCH multiframes2 4 SACCH multiframes

. ..


0 Use existing algorithm1 Use new algorithm

0 Update the BCCH/CCCH timeslots1 Update all timeslots on the BCCH carrier2 Update all timeslots on all carriers of cell

Represents RACH slots as shown below:0 3 RACH 8 11 RACH

1 4 RACH 9 12 RACH2 5 RACH 10 14 RACH3 6 RACH 11 16 RACH

4 7 RACH 12 20 RACH5 8 RACH 13 25 RACH6 9 RACH 14 32 RACH7 10 RACH 15 50 RACH

0 Low power1 High power


. ..

63 47 dBm�


. ..

63 47 dBm�


. ..

63 47 dBm�


. ..

63 47 dBm�

0 to 1810 BER (1 step = 0.01% bit

error rate)If alt_qual_proc = 0


0 to 1810 BER (1 step = 0.01% bit



0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Send alarm to the OMC-R1 Send unequipped circuit message to the MSC

2 Send alarm to the OMC-R and send unequippedcircuit message to the MSC

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 CCDSP Volume Control1 GDP Volume Control

0 Handover disabled1 Handover enabled

0 to 30 (Not Dual Band Cell))60 to 63 (Dual Band Cell)�

Default value Dependencies

0 none NO

0 none YES

0 none NO

0 none NO

0 none NO

0 none NO

0 none NO

Supported by OMC-R GUI

0 none NO

0 none NO

0 none NO

0 none NO

This parameter is invalid when ba_type is ba_bcch. NO

0 NO

0 YES

40 (the value of 40 corresponds to a

hreqave of 8 and ahandover margin of

5)

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.The dynamic allocation of terrestrial resources

feature must be disabled for GPRS sites.This parameter prevents GPRS usage on RTFs that

are subequipped in the database.max_gprs_pdch must be enabled can not be set to

zero without first disabling allow_32k_trau.Verifications must be performed to ensure that there

are enough terrestrial resources available whenmax_gprs_pdch is increased and allow_32k_trau.

is enabled.

The value that is entered for the alt_qual_procparameter determines the type of values, the rangeof values, and the default values for the dependent

parameters.

0 none YES

0 NONE NO

0 NONE YES

YES

0 YES

6 NONE NO

The frequency type of the cell (as set

by frequency_type).

The Multiband Inter-cell handover feature must beenabled.

This parameter has no meaning ifband_preference_mode = 0 for this cell.

This parameter is unavailable if the MultibandInter-cell handover feature is disabled.

4 NONE NO

0 YES

0 ccch_conf YES

0 YES

1 NO

After a RXQUAL handover, the system applies thebounce_protect_margin value for the number of

SACCH periods set by thebounce_protect_qual_tmr timer.

After a congestion handover, the system applies thebounce_protect_margin value for the number of

SACCH periods set by thebounce_protect_cong_tmr timer.

The value chosen for this field will be dependantupon the size of the location area and the ratio of

mobile originated to mobile terminated calls.

The value of this parameter may be specified for theBSC (site 0) only while in the initial SYSGEN mode.

This command is only available for the BSC(location=0).

NONE NONE YES

0 This parameter is valid only at a BSC. NO

3 NO

2 NO

3 The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. NO


1 NO


decision_alg_num = 1 YES

This parameter can be used only if the GPRS featureis unrestricted.

Dependencies The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.If the local_maintenance parameter is disabled, the

MMI is prevented from changing this element.

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.If the local_maintenance parameter is disabled, the


1 (equals 2 SACCH multiframes)

YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

NONE NO

NONE YES

2 (equals 4 SACCH multiframes)

This parameter will not work if the specified locationis the BSC (location = 0).

hreqavebts_p_con_ack

decision_1_n1 through decision_1_n4decision_1_p1 through decision_1_p4

This parameter may be modified only when the DualBand Cells feature is unrestricted.

This parameter may not be changed to 0 if DHPsexist at the site, or if max_dris is set to 0.

This parameter may not be changed at Horizonofficesites. It is automatically set to 1 when a

Horizonoffice cabinet is equipped.This parameter must be set to 0 for M-Cell2, M-Cell6,

M-Cellcity, M-Cellarena, M-Cellarenamacro andHorizonmacro cabinets.


A BVCI cannot be modified if gprs_enabled is set forthe cell.

0 NONE NO

NONE NONE NO

NONE NONE NO

NONE NO

30 NO

1 This parameter is valid only for the BSC. YES

0 This parameter is only valid for the BSC. YES

0 This parameter is only valid for the BSC. YES

This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice BTSsites.


NONE YES

0 This parameter is only valid for a BTS site. YES

YES

40 YES

Enabling of CBCH is not permitted if no AGCH isreserved in a non-combined cell (bs-ag-blks-res = 0

and ccch-conf other than 1).

If ccch_conf = 0, 2, 4, or 6, values for the followingparameters must meet specific criteria:– number_sdcchs_preferred must be inmultiples of 8 with no offset (divisible by

8) (that is, 0, 8, 16,...,48)– number_sdcchs_preferred must be

less than or equal tosdcch_need_low_water_mark.

– The minimum number of sdcchs mustbe divisible by 8.

– max_number_of_sdcchs must bedivisible by 8.

– 0 bs_ag_blks_res 7If ccch_conf = 1, values for the following parameters

must meet specific criteria:– number_sdcchs_preferred must be inmultiples of 8, with an offset of 4 (that is,

0,4,12,...,44 )– The minimum number of sdcchs must

be a multiple of 8 (+4).– max_number_of_sdcchs must be a

multiple of 8 (+4).– 0 bs_ag_blks_res 2

Enabling of CBCH is not permitted (cbch-enabled =1) if no AGCH is reserved in a non-combined cell(bs-ag-blks-res = 0 and ccch-conf is other than 1).This parameter can be used with the GPRS feature

unrestricted as follows:– Set to 0, seven PDCHs are supported

for a BCCH carrier.– Set to 1, seven PDCHs are supported

for a BCCH carrier.– Set to 2, six PDCHs are supported for a

BCCH carrier.– Set to 4, five PDCHs are supported for a

BCCH carrier.– Set to 6, four PDCHs are supported for

a BCCH carrier.The GPRS timeslots on the GPRS carrier must have

the same FHI.GPRS channels must have the same training

sequence codes.If GPRS is unrestricted for a cell, attempts to modifyccch_conf are rejected if the required timeslots are

configured as GPRS timeslots.

This parameter must be greater than or equal to therach_load_period.

0 cell_bar_access_switch YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

NONE C1 (path loss criterion) YES

0 YES

0 NONE YES

This parameter cannot be changed if thecell_reselect_param_ind parameter does not equal

1.

This parameter may not be changed if thecell_reselect_parm_ind parameter is not equal to 1.

0 NONE YES

0 YES

1 YES

6 YES

1 NONE YES

NONE YES

cic_error_clr_threshold must be less thancic_error_rate_monitor.

cic_error_gen threshold minus thecic_error_clr_threshold, divided by

cic_error_decrement must be greater than or equalto two.

cic_error_gen_threshold must be larger thancic_error_clr_threshold.

cic_error_gen threshold minuscic_error_clr_threshold, divided by


cic_error_gen_threshold must be larger thancic_error_clr_threshold.



This parameter may not be changed if the dynamicallocation mode is enabled.

0 NO

24 NONE NO

NONE NO

NONE NO

0 NO

This parameter only applies to the BSC (location =0).

This parameter may only be changed if theCoincident MultiBand Handover option is

unrestricted.If coincident_mb is set to 1 or 2, both cells must be

SACCH neighbours of each other.If coincident_mb is set to 2, both cells must be at

the same site, the cells must be neighbours of eachother, and the bsic settings must be the same.

A cell cannot be coincident to itself.

This parameter may only be changed if theCoincident MultiBand Handover option is enabled.If coincident_mb is set to 1 or 2, both cells must be

SACCH neighbours of each other.If coincident_mb is set to 2, both cells must be at

the same site, the cells must be neighbours of eachother, and the bsic settings must be the same.

If a coincident cell has not been selected, the value ofcoincident_mb must equal 0.

A cell cannot be coincident to itself.This parameter must be disabled when

inner_zone_alg is set to indicate Dual Band Cells.

This parameter may only be changed if theCoincident MultiBand Handover option is enabled.

0 NO

0 YES

0 YES

NONE YES

0 NONE NO

1 NONE NO

NONE NO

60 NO

This parameter does not apply to RXCDR sites.This parameter only applies to the BSC (location =

0).

The parameter can be set only if the CongestionRelief feature is unrestricted.

The parameter can be set only if the CongestionRelief feature is unrestricted.

This parameter can only be modified if: either the Directed Retry or Alternate

Congestion Relief options are available,and

the neighbour is placed on the SACCH list.


ct_flow_control_hi_level must be greater thanct_flow_control_lo_level plus 20.

20 NO

0 NONE NO

0 alt_qual_proc YES

0 rxlev_dl_ho YES

0 rxlev_dl_ho YES

0 rxlev_dl_pc YES

0 rxqual_dl_ho YES

ct_flow_control_lo_level must be less thanct_flow_control_hi_level minus 20.

0 rxqual_dl_pc YES

1 YES

1 YES

1 YES

N1 must be greater than or equal to P1. N1 must beless than or equal to the hreqt value set using

chg_act_alg_data command for rxlev_dl_pc andrxlev_ul_pc.


chg_act_alg_data command for rxlev_dl_pc andrxlev_ul_pc.


chg_act_alg_data command for rxqual_dl_pc andrxqual_ul_pc.

1 YES

1 YES

1 YES

1 YES


chg_act_alg_data command for rxqual_dl_pc andrxqual_ul_pc.


chg_act_alg_data command for rxlev_dl_ho andrxlev_ul_ho.


chg_act_alg_data command for rxqual_dl_ho andrxqual_ul_ho.


chg_act_alg_data command for rxlev_dl_ho andrxlev_ul_ho.

1 YES

0 surround_cell YES

0 NONE YES

0 rel_tim_adv YES

0 rxlev_ul_ho YES

0 rxlev_ul_ho YES

N8 must be greater than or equal to P8.N8 must be less than or equal to the Hreqt value set

for rel_tim_adv

0 rxlev_ul_pc YES

0 rxqual_ul_ho YES

0 rxqual_ul_pc YES

0 NONE YES

63 YES

The Concentric Cells option must be enabled in orderto set this parameter.


0 NONE YES

0 YES

0 NO

1 NONE YES

NONE NONE YES

0 NO

The volume_control_type parameter controls thedl_audio_lev_offset application:

If volume_control_type = 0, then thedl_audio_lev_offset parameter does not have

any effect at RXCDR sites. If volume_control_type = 1, then the

dl_audio_lev_offset parameter only applies tosites equipped with GDP boards. The GDP

firmware controls the volume level byconverting the audio level bits for the entered

offset.

The dl_dtx_voice_data parameter affects speechonly if dnlk_vad_dtx is enabled.

Must be executed in SYSGEN mode.This parameter can be displayed or changed only atsites where transcoding is enabled (RXCDR or local

transcoding BSC).When enabled, the dnlk_vad_dtx parameter makes

the dl_dtx_voice_data parameter alive.

NONE This parameter is only valid at the BSC (location = 0). YES

1 YES

0 YES

0 YES

0 YES

This parameter can only be modified if: either the Directed Retry option is available,

and the neighbour is placed on the SACCH list

and the neighbour is external.

Requires the Directed Retry option.This parameter can be changed only at the BSC.

The MSC may need to increase the timer waiting forthe Assignment Complete message from the BSS

when this database parameter is enabled.The BSS does not initiate an external handover due

to the Directed Retry procedure if themsc_preference parameter indicates that directed

retry is supported only within the BSS (not across theA-interface) when the dr_standard_congest

parameter is enabled.This parameter requires the Directed Retry option.

This parameter requires that dr_preference beenabled.

dr_standard_congestdr_ho_during_assign

Requires the Directed Retry option.This parameter can only be changed at the BSC.

0 YES

2 NONE YES

0 YES

0 NONE YES

10 NONE NO

Requires the Directed Retry option. Directed Retrymust be on.

dr_preference must 0The MSC may need to increase the timer waiting forthe Assignment Complete message from the BSS


to the Directed Retry procedure if themsc_preference parameter indicates that directedretry is supported within the BSS (not across the

A-interface) when the dr_standard_congestparameter is enabled.


0 NO

0 YES

NONE NONE NO

This parameter is not available unless the containingsite is configured to support dynamic allocation.

The parameter is invalid for the BSC (location 0).The system will reject the command if the cell_desc

equals all.The Dynamic Allocation option must be in operation.

The Multiband Inter-cell Handover feature must beenabled.

This parameter can only be changed at the BSC(location = 0), but it can be viewed at any site within a

specified BSS.

NONE NONE NO

NONE NONE NO

NONE NONE NO

0 YES

0 YES

0 YES

0 cell_bar_access_class YES

1 NONE YES

35 NONE YES

The EFR feature must be unrestricted.This parameter cannot be enabled if the

handover_required_sp_ver_used parameter isdisabled.

This parameter is only valid at BSC or RXCDRlocations (location = 0).

The bss_id is only valid at a RXCDR site.

The egsm_bcch_sd parameter can be disabled onlyif:

The BCCH carrier is not in the GSM Extensionband.

The sd_load parameter is 0 for all carriers inthe Cell.

If the hopping systems (both enabled anddisabled) do not contain a combination of

PGSM and GSM extension band frequencies. If the neighbour BCCH frequencies are not in

the GSM extension band.The egsm_bcch_sd parameter can be enabled only

if the cell is an EGSM frequency cell.

This parameter may only be changed on EGSMsystems.

0 YES

0 NONE YES

The ext_range_cell parameter cannot be changed ifthe Extended Range Cells feature is restricted.The number of extended range timeslots on theBCCH RTF must support the BCCH, CCCH, andSDCCH channels as these channels are always

extended.ms_max_range must be less than or equal to 63 for

a normal range cell. If ext_range_cell is enabled,the maximum value of ms_max_range increases to

219.max_number_sdcchs must be less than or equal to

20 when Extended Range is enabled.Baseband hopping systems can only be configured

among timeslots of the same type, such as extendedor normal.

If frequency hopping systems is enabled in anExtended Range Cell, all frequency hopping

indicators for the timeslots in the BCCH carriershould be set to “255” (in hexadecimal, 0xff).

This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice BTS,M-Cellcity, M-Cellarena or M-Cellarenamacro sites.

NONE YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

If the Infrastructure Sharing Homogeneous Cabinetfeature is not enabled, the frequency_type for every

cabinet and cell at a site must be the same.If the Infrastructure Sharing Homogeneous Cabinet

feature is enabled, but the Infrastructure SharingHeterogeneous feature is disabled, the cells at a site

must have the same single frequency type as thecabinet they correlate to. However, the cabinets at

the site may be of different frequency typesIf both the Infrastructure Sharing HomogeneousCabinet feature and the Infrastructure Sharing

Heterogeneous feature are enabled, the cells at asite may have different frequency types and cabinetsmay support multiple frequency types. However, thecell frequency must be supported by the cabinet the

cell is correlated to.If inner_zone_alg is set to indicate Dual Band Cells,the following two dependencies are enforced: (1) ifsecondary_freq_type is set to EGSM or PGSM, thefrequency_type may be set only to DCS 1800; (2) if

secondary_freq_type is DCS 1800,frequency_type may be set only to PGSM or

EGSM.Cell and cabinet frequency types must be allowed atthe BSS as per the freq_types_allowed command.

The Fast GCLK Warmup feature must beunrestricted.

The GCLK version must be V9 or later.

NONE YES

16 YES

6 The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. YES

1 YES


This parameter does not apply to RXCDR sites.This parameter applies to only BSC sites.

This parameter may not be modified if any BSP, BTP,DHP, GPROC, or MSI is equipped.

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.This parameter can be set to a value of 1 (mode A)

or a value of 2 (mode B) only whengprs_pc_meas_chan is set to 0 (BCCH).

This parameter cannot be set to 2 (mode B) whengprs_mac_mode is set to 1 (dynamic mode).

0

1 YES

0 YES

Dependencies The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.The PCU must be equipped.

max_gprs_pdch must be set to a nonzerovalue.� �At least one nsvc must be associated with a GBL.

The nsei parameter must be configured by theoperator.

A PSP and the default GSL must be equipped at thePCU.

A routing area colour must have been configured forthe cell; see the ra_colour parameter.

The RAC parameter must be set.GPRS timeslot resources are recalculated to ensure

that the number of PRP timeslots equipped at thePCU is greater than or equal to the sum of

max_gprs_pdch for each carrier in cells whereGPRS is unrestricted.

GPRS timeslot resources are recalculated to ensurethat the number of GDS timeslots to the PCU is

greater than or equal to the sum of max_gprs_pdchfor each carrier in cells where GPRS is unrestricted.

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.The PCU must be equipped.

max_gprs_pdch must be set to a nonzerovalue.� �At least one nsvc must be associated with a GBL.









The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.This parameter can not be set to 1 (dynamic mode)

when gprs_dl_pwr_mode is set to 2 (mode B).

1 YES



31

The gprs_ms_pan_dec parameter specifies the amount by which to decrement the MS

counter n3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks received

by the MS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented by

gprs_ms_pan_inc. n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the preset

internal timer T3182 expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182

defines how long the mobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero,

then the MS performs an abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSM

standard referred to in this description.







0 YES

1 This parameter can be set only at the BSC. YES

2 YES

This parameter is only valid at the BSC.This parameter does not apply to RXCDR sites.

The maximum value for a PGSM or EGSM system is19.

The maximum value for a DCS1800 system is 15.

0 This parameter only applies to the BSC. YES

0 This parameter applies only to the BSC. YES

0 YES

6 YES

6 YES

The handover_required_sp_ver_used parametercannot be disabled (0) if the efr_enabled parameter

is enabled (1).

S This parameter may only be changed if theHDSL option is unrestricted.

S This parameter may only be changed at anM-Cellcity, Horizonmicro or Horizoncompact

site.S Changing this parameter affects all mastermodems equipped as msi_type niu_hdsl at

the local M-Cell site.S All slave modem alarm thresholds are identical

to the master modem alarm thresholds.






16 YES

18 YES

20 YES

14 YES

16 YES








Changing this parameter affects all master modemsequipped as msi_type niu_hdsl at the local M-Cell

site.All slave modem alarm thresholds are identical to the




Changing this parameter affects all master modemsequipped as msi_type niu_hdsl at the local

M-Cellcity or Horizonmicro site.All slave modem alarm thresholds are identical to the


This parameter may be changed only if the HDSLoption is unrestricted.

This parameter may be changed only at anM-Cellcity, Horizonmicro or Horizoncompact site.



master modem alarm thresholds.The hdsl_snr_oos threshold must be lower than the

hdsl_snr_restore threshold.





master modem alarm thresholds.The hdsl_snr_oos threshold must be lower than the

hdsl_snr_restore threshold.

0 YES

8 NONE YES

63 NONE YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

Congestion Relief feature is required.The MSC may need to increase the timer waiting forthe Assignment Complete message from the BSS

when this database parameter is enabled.

To use the ho_only_max_pwr parameter, thedecision_alg_type parameter must equal 1, to allow

the MS or BTS to reach full power.

2 YES

255 NONE YES

0 YES

0 YES

NONE YES

NONE YES


alt_qual_procThis parameter is not valid at Horizonoffice BTS

sites.

The hopping_support paPlace the system in the SYSGEN ON mode before

using the chg_element or chg_cell_elementcommands to change this parameter.

Using the chg_hop_param command to change thehopping system does not require SYSGEN ON.rameter

defines the frequency hopping in a cell.

The system must be in SYSGEN ON mode tochange this parameter with the chg_element or

chg_cell_element commands.Using the chg_hop_params command to change

the hopping system does not require SYSGEN ON.

Respond to the SITE reset prompt which will bedisplayed after the chg_element command is

entered to modify this parameter.

NONE YES


0 NONE YES

Refer to the descriptions for the chg_hop_paramscommand for restrictions on changing the hopping

parameters.The system does not check for errors when changesare made in SYSGEN ON mode. When SYSGEN is

turned off, however, the system does check forerrors, and may reject the command.

0 YES

8 NONE YES

1 NONE YES

The Concentric Cells feature must be unrestricted tochange inner_zone_alg.


Cannot set this parameter to Dual Band cells forPCS1900 cells.

Before this parameter can be set to Dual Band (3)the following dependencies must be met:

The Dual Band Cells feature must be unrestricted inorder to set inner_zone_alg to 3.

The Coincident Multiband feature and the Dual BandCells feature must not be set at the same time, so

coincident_mb must be 0.RTFs must not be equipped for the inner zone.

The Multiband Inter-Cell Handover feature must beenabled to change inner_zone_alg to 3

(mb_preference parameter must not be 0).

YES

63 YES

1 NONE YES

1 NONE YES

None YES

10 NONE YES

If the Multiband Inter-cell Handover feature is enabled:3 for PGSM and

EGSM cells4 for DCS1800

cells8 for PCS1900

cells

This parameter is not available unless the MultibandInter-cell Handover feature is enabled.

This parameter must include, at a minimum, thefrequency type for the cell. For example, if the cell

has a frequency_type of pgsm, then theinterband_ho_allowed parameter must include

pgsm as a possible destination frequency band forhandovers.

interfer_bands,0 must be less than or equal tointerfer_bands,1




Changing this parameter is not allowed at M-Cellsites.

30 Must be less than u_rxlev_dl_p YES

10 NONE YES

30 Must be less than u_rxlev_ul_p YES

YES

YES

453 BER / 5 Qband

alt_qual_proc.See also data_qual_enabled, hop_qual_enabled

0 BER If dat_qual_enabled =

04QBand units If

data_qual_enabled = 1

data_qual_enabledalt_qual_proc

YES

YES

YES

0 BER If dat_qual_enabled =

04QBand units If


hop_qual_enabledalt_qual_proc

This parameter may not be changed for Horizonofficesites.

226 BER If alt_qual_proc = 04 QBand units If alt_qual_proc = 1

alt_qual_procMust be greater than u_rxqual_dl_p

See also data_qual_enabled, hop_qual_enabled

0 BER If data_qual_enabled

= 04 QBand units If



YES

YES

YES

0 BER If data_qual_enabled

= 04 QBand units If





alt_qual_procSee also data_qual_enabled, hop_qual_enabled



YES

YES

YES








alt_qual_procMust be greater than u_rxqual_ul_p


YES

YES

0 YES






The value of this parameter may be specified for theBSC (site 0) only while in the initial SYSGEN mode.The value of this parameter may not be changed if

any MSIs or BTS sites are equipped.land_layer1_mode cannot be changed to 1 (T1)

unless mms_config_type = 0.Horizonoffice BTS sites support E1 (2.048 Mbit/s �

CEPT format) BSC-BTS links only. This parametermust be set to E1 before a Horizonoffice cabinet canbe equipped. This parameter cannot be changed at

Horizonoffice BTS sites.If the GPRS feature is unrestricted and a PCU isequipped, this parameter must be set to 0 (E1).

0 The Microcellular feature must be unrestricted. YES

2 YES

4 YES

1 YES

link_about_to_fail must be less than link_failmax_tx_bts

link_fail must be greater than or equal tolink_about_to_fail

Place the system in the SYSGEN ON mode beforeusing the chg_element command to change this

parameter.

0 NONE YES

7 NONE YES

1 This parameter is valid only at Horizonoffice sites.



NONE YES

0 YES

NONE YES

NONE NONE YES


0 frequency_type YES

YES

0 YES

For combined channel configurations, the values canbe 4, 12, 20, 28 SDs

For non-combined channel configurations, the valuescan be 8, 16, 24, 32 SDs

The sum of max_q_length_full_rate_channel plusmax_q_length_sdcch must be less than or equal to

queue_management_information.



The range and default values ofmstxpwr_max_inner depends on this parameter. Ifthe range or default value of max_tx_ms changes,

mstxpwr_max_inner must also be updated, to avalue less than or equal to max_ts_ms.

This parameter is unavailable if the MultibandInter-Cell Handover feature is restricted.

This parameter may not be disabled wheninner_zone_alg is set to indicate Dual Band Cells for

any cell in the BSS.

YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

0 ms_max_range YES

100 (The value 100 indicates an

attempt to use the last

resource).

The parameter can be set only if S the Congestion Relief feature is unrestricted

(ho_exist_congest element must beenabled).

S mb_preference element must be enabled.S band_preference_mode must be set to 6

(the mode which triggers when a Cell iscongested).

S mb_tch_congest_thres must be less thanor equal to tch_congest_prevent_thres.

The system must be in SYSGEN ON mode to modifythis parameter.

PCS1900 systems accept only the four parametercell number format.

This parameter is valid only at the BSC.

The value of the land_layer1_mode parameter:S For E1 systems (land_layer1_mode =0), thevalue of this parameter can be changed at anytime for any site. If executed outside SYSGENmode, a warning message saying the MMSs

must be reset to have the change take effect atthat site will display.

S mms_config_type cannot be changed to 1 ifland_layer1_mode = 1 (T1).

The value of mms_config_type must be the same atthe BSC and the PCU sites.

63 YES

2 decision_alg_num = 1 YES

2 hreqave YES

1 NONE YES

0 YES

The range for the ms_max_range parameterdepends on whether the Extended Range feature is

enabled or disabled.This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice sites.

If the cell is not a type 3 MS cell, 0 is the only valueallowed.

2 frequency_type YES

None ms_txpwr_max_def YES

None ms_txpwr_max_cell YES

YESSame value as

max_tx_ms

ms_txpwr_max_inner must be less than or equal tomax_tx_ms if the value for inner_zone_alg equals 1

(Dual Band cell).This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice BTS

sites.

0 YES

Place the system in SYSGEN ON mode YES

The Directed Retry or the Multiband IntercellHandover feature must be unrestricted.

84 (representing bit pattern 01010100)

0 NONE YES

0 YES

0 YES


255 0 to 255 (or 0 to FFh in Hex) YES

If the element is changed in SYSGEN ON mode, thechange takes effect immediately.

The Multiband Intercell Handover feature must beenabled.

0 NONE YES

NONE YES




NONE YES

1 NONE YES

off NONE NO

The MTL must be locked then unlocked for thechange to take effect.

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.Sysgen mode cannot be left until the nsei parameter

has been configured by the operator.The nsei parameter cannot be modified until all GBLs

have been locked.

off NONE NO

off NONE NO

off NONE NO



16 NONE YES

YES

NONE YES

0 YES

4 if ccch_conf equals 1; 8 if ccch_conf not

equal to 1

The value of this parameter must be less than orequal to the max_number_of_sdcchs.

The valid range for this parameter depends on thevalue of ccch_conf.

The value of opc depends on the values ofss7_mode .

This parameter only applies to the BSC.

This parameter applies only to the BSC or RXCDR.The Multiple Encryption feature must be unrestricted.

0 YES

0 YES

0 YES

0 YES

0 YES

0 YES

0 This parameter only applies to the BSC or RXCDR. YES

0 YES








The Concentric Cells feature must be enabled.This parameter can not be modified at a

Horizonoffice site.

0 YES

0 YES

0 YES




None This parameter only applies to the BSC. YES

0 NONE YES

This parameter is not allowed at the RXCDR.This parameter is only applied at the BSC (location 0).

The EFR feature must be enabled to change thisparameter.

The Dual Band Cells feature must be unrestricted.Changing this parameter to 1 adds this cell to its wonneighbour list. This auto-created neighbour will notbe deleted by the user. It can only be deleted by

changing this element back to 0.

This parameter only applies to the BSC.You must reset the BSC when changing this

parameter for the change to take effect.


0 NONE YES

2 YES

2 YES

2 YES

2 YES

1 YES

0 YES

This parameter must be greater than or equal topow_red_step_size_dl.

This parameter must be greater than or equal topow_red_step_size_ul.

This parameter must be less than or equal topow_inc_step_size_dl.

This paremeter must be less than or equal topow_inc_step_size_ul.

The Microcell feature must be unrestricted to use thisparameter.

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. Queuingmust be enabled and the priority sent from the MSC

in the assignment request must be a value between 1and 14; if this is not done, the last timeslot acts like a

reserved timeslot.

1 NONE YES

1 NONE YES

50 YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

16 YES

YES

NONE NONE YES

4 NONE YES

The sum of (max_q_length_full_rate_channel +max_q_length_sdcch) must be less than or equal to


This parameter applies only to GPRS cells.The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.

If the local_maintenance flag is disabled, thisparameter cannot be changed through the MMI.


This parameter displays only when the value hasbeen set previously by the operator.

This parameter must be less than or equal toccch_load_period.

1000 (Disables flow control)

If rach_load_type is 1, then the units for thisparameter is (# correct RACH accesses/# incorrect

RACH accesses).If rach_load_type is 0, then the units for this

parameter is (# correct RACH access/# possibleRACH accesses).

0 NONE YES

0 YES

1 YES

6 YES


16 NONE YES

rci_error_gen threshold minusrci_error_clr_threshold, divided by the

rci_error_decrement must be greater than or equalto 2.

This parameter only applies to the BSC or RXCDR.

rci_error_gen threshold minus therci_error_clr_threshold, divided by the





This parameter applies only to the BSC or RXCDR.

20 NONE YES

511 NONE YES

6000 NONE YES

25 NONE YES

150 NONE YES

0 NONE YES

YES

16 NONE YES

20 NONE YES

511 NONE YES

6000 NONE YES

5 NONE YES

5 NONE YES

4 if alg_data=0 1 if alg_data=1

When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not beset equal to decision_1_tim_adv_av_alg.

2 YES

12 YES

10 NONE YES

8 YES

2 NONE YES

Must be less thanreport_resource_tch_f_low_water_mark

Must be greater thanreport_resource_tch_f_high_water_mark

This parameter must be less than rpd_trigger.The parameter rapid_pwr_down must be enabled.

45 ( 65 dBm)� YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

0 NONE YES

YES

This parameter must be greater than l_rxlev_ul_p.This parameter must be greater than rpd_offset.

The parameter rapid_pwr_down must be enabled.

The RTF Fault Containment option must beunrestricted to use this parameter.



When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not beset equal to one of the following parameters:

decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_hdecision_1_dl_rxlev_av_ih


YES

63 YES

15 YES

YES

YES


When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not beset equal to decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_p.

The Concentric Cells Option must be enabled andthe inner_zone_alg type must be set to 1.


Each step represents 1 dBm as shown below:0 110 dBm and lower�

1 109 dBm�2 108 dBm�

. ..


4 if alg_data=0 6 if alg_data=1 1

if alg_data=2

When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not beset equal to either:

decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_h, ordecision_1_ul_rxlev_av_ih


if alg_data=2

When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not beset equal to decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_p.

63 YES

YES

YES

decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_h YES

decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_p YES

255 YES

The Concentric Cells Option must be enabled andthe inner_zone_alg parameter must be set to 1.



if alg_data=2

When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not beset equal to decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_h.


if alg_data=2

When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not beset equal to decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_p.


if alg_data=2


if alg_data=2

0 Safe (Safe Tests)1 int_lpbk (Internal Loopback Tests)

2 Self test255 No audit

NONE NONE YES

NONE NONE YES

NONE NONE YES

NONE NONE YES

1 NO

NONE YES

2 NONE YES


parameter.

External SDCCH handover must be enabled at andsupported by the MSC.

The hand_over_required_curr_ ch parameter mustbe set to 1 so as to include the information element in

the handover required message to the MSC.

12 NONE YES

0 YES

1 YES


NO

The Multiband Intercell Handover feature must beunrestricted.

The sdcch_ho parameter must be enabled. (This isnot monitored by the system.)

This parameter is set to the primary frequency typewhen a cell is not configured as a Dual Band cell.

This parameter may be modified only when changinginner_zone_alg to 3 with the chg_cell_element

command.At Dual Band cells:

S When the Cell frequency type is set to PGSMor EGSM, the secondary_freq_type can only

be set to DCS1800.S When the Cell frequency type is set to

DCS1800, the secondary_freq_type can onlybe set to PGSM or EGSM.

At non-Dual Band cells, the secondary_freq_type isset to the primary frequency type.

4 NONE NO

10

255 NONE YES

6000 NONE NO

31 The PCU must be locked. YES

31 The PCU must be locked. YES

0 The SMS Point to Point feature must be unrestricted. YES

2 The SMS Point to Point feature must be unrestricted. NO

The SMS Point to Point feature must be unrestricted. YES

0 NO

This parameter must be greater thanslip_loss_daily.

The system checks the values of the opc and dpcvariables and compares them to the value of

ss7_mode. If the ranges are not compatible, thesystem rejects the changes.

This parameter requires a location value of 0 or� �bsc.� �

80 NO

70 NO

250 NONE NO

70 NO

200 NONE NO

10 NONE NO

Must be greater than thessm_normal_overload_threshold parameter.

This parameter applies only to a BSC.

Must be less than thessm_critical_overload_threshold parameter.




30 NO

NONE decision_1_p_bgt_rxlev_av_h YES

0 This parameter applies only to a BSC. NO

16 NO

20 NO

511 NONE NO

6000 NONE NO

Must be set to 30 or 60 minutes to align with theOMC-R.

This parameter must be less thansync_loss_hourly.

This parameter must be greater thansync_loss_daily.

25 NONE NO

150 NONE NO

10 NONE NO

10 NONE NO

100 NO

100 NO

YES

Must be greater than or equal totch_busy_norm_threshold.

Must be less than or equal totch_busy_critical_threshold.

100 (The value 100 indicates an

attempt to use the last

resource).

The Congestion Relief feature must be enabled.This parameter must be greater than or equal to

mb_tch_congest_thres.

0 NONE YES

255 NONE YES

7 YES

7 NONE YES

This parameter may not be changed if thecell_reselect_param_ind parameter is not set.

4 hreqave, n8, p8 YES

5 YES

5 YES

50 YES

This parameter is used only when handover recordsare requested and RSS, Abis and/or MS Power

control data are specified.This parameter applies only to the BSC.

This parameter is used only when handover recordsare requested and RSS, Abis and/or MS Power

control data are specified.This parameter applies only to the BSC.

This parameter must be greater than the valueassigned to the trunk_major_threshold parameter

unless both values are set to 0.This parameter applies only to the BSC.

50 YES

0 YES

0 YES

4 NONE YES

0 YES

This parameter must be less than the value assignedto the trunk_critical_threshold parameter unless

both values are set to 0.This parameter applies only to the BSC.

This parameter cannot be altered unless theAggregate Abis feature is enabled.

This parameter applies only to the BSC.

No RTFs are equipped (tsc_update_method mustfirst be set before RTFs can be equipped in the

script). Equip RTF verifies the TSC values based onthis setting.


This parameter is valid only if the transceivers at thesite are inactive.

The system does not accept this parameter if theassociated DRIs are unlocked.

45 YES

40 NONE YES

45 YES

40 NONE YES

YES

l_rxqual_dl_hThis parameter is used by the BSS only when

interfer_ho_allowed is 1.

l_rxqual_ul_hThis parameter is used by the BSS only when



alt_qual_procSince better rxqual corresponds to a lower bit error

rate, u_rxqual_dl_p should be less thanl_rxqual_dl_p.

YES

0 YES

1 NONE YES

1 NONE YES

0 NO

0 This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice sites. YES

0 NONE YES


alt_qual_procSince better rxqual corresponds to a lower bit error

rate, u_rxqual_ul_p must be less thanl_rxqual_ul_p.

The volume_control_type parameter controls theul_audio_lev_offset application. Ifvolume_control_type = 1, then the

ul_audio_lev_offset parameter only applies to sitesequipped with GDP boards. The GDP firmware

controls the volume level by converting the audiolevel bits for the entered offset.


This parameter does not apply to RXCDR sites.This parameter applies only to a BSC.

The Phase 2 optional feature which must bepurchased.

0 YES

10 NONE YES

5 NONE YES

0 NONE YES

The Generic DSP Processor (GDP) Volume Controlfeature must be available.

If volume_control_type is set to 1, the BSS must beequipped with GDP boards, unless remote

transcoding, when RXCDR must contain a GDPboard to serve the BSS.

CCDSP (Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor)volume control cannot be directly initiated from an

RXCDR. (There are no DRIs at the RXCDR).However, by setting the parameter to 0 at the BSCand at the RXCDR, CCDSP (DRI) volume control is

used in this BSS.The parameters ul_audio_lev_offset and

dl_audio_lev_offset must be set to 0 beforechanging volume_control_type.


0 YES

The Concentric Cells feature must be unrestricted.The range depends on the value of inner_zone_alg:

S Dual Band Cell: 63 to 63.�S Not Dual Band Cell: 0 to 30.


DATABASE PARAMETER Description

add_access_class

assign_successful

bcch_info

bounce_protect_cong_tmr

bounce_protect_qual_tmr

bsc_audit

bsc_audit_response

bssgp_fc_period_c

bssgp_t1_timer

bssgp_t2_timer

bssmap_t1

The add_access_class timer specifies the guard time period between individual mobileaccess classes to come into service. This permits MSs to access the system gradually.

The assign_successful timer causes a Clear Request message to be sent to the MSCwhen it expires.

The bcch_info timer specifies the wait time for the Radio Subsystem (RSS) to hold aninformation message for the BCCH System Information Messages from Call Processing(CP) before sending the information message to the channel coders.

The bounce_protect_cong_tmr timer specifies the number of SACCH periods after acongestion handover that the system applies the bounce_protect_margin value.

The bounce_protect_qual_tmr timer specifies the number of SACCH periods after aRXQUAL handover the system applies the bounce_protect_margin value.

The bsc_audit timer specifies how long activity is monitored on a dedicated channel.

The bsc_audit_response timer specifies the wait time for audit ssm call response fromRRSM timer.

The bssgp_fc_period_c timer specifies the rate at which the BSS is allowed to sendflow control messages for a given BVC or MS. The BSS may send a new Flow ControlPDU every C seconds, where C is a value which is predefined and common to the BSSand SGSN.

The bssgp_t1_timer guards the BVC Blocking and Unblocking procedures between theBSS and SGSN.

The bssgp_t2_timer guards the BVC Reset procedure between the BSS and the SGSN.

The bssmap_t1 timer specifies the wait time for a Blocking Acknowledge or UnblockingAcknowledge from the MSC. The value set must allow enough time for the MSC torespond to a Block/Unblock, even if the MSC is not in a state to respond immediately. Atypical value for this timer is 1000 milliseconds.

bssmap_t10

bssmap_t11

bssmap_t13

bssmap_t19

bssmap_t20

bssmap_t4

bssmap_t7

bssmap_t8

bssmap_tqho

bts_audit

bts_audit_response

The bssmap_t10 timer specifies the wait time for return assignment complete MS.Because the bssmap_t10 timer is used twice in the system, it is considered to be a timerin cascade and its value corresponds to the lowest assigned value.

The bssmap_t11 timer specifies the wait time for a queued resource request.

The bssmap_t13 timer specifies the wait time for the reset guard period at the BSS.

The bssmap_t19 timer specifies the wait time for a Reset Circuit Acknowledge from theMSC. The value must allow the MSC enough time to respond to a BSC initiated ResetCircuit. A typical value for this timer is 1000 milliseconds.

The bssmap_t20 timer specifies the wait time for Circuit Group Blocking Ack or CircuitGroup Unblocking Ack from MSC. A typical value for this timer is 1000 milliseconds.

The bssmap_t4 timer specifies the wait time for return of the Reset Acknowledgementfrom MSC. This timer must be set to allow enough time for the BSS to recover from aglobal reset. A typical value for this timer is 1000 milliseconds.

In an inter-BSS (external) handover, the BSC (SSM) timer bssmap_t7 guards againstsomething going wrong at the MSC with the handover that the BSC has triggered. TheBSC responds to the MSC and sets the timer to guard against non-receipt of the MSCapproval to proceed with the handover. If the timer expires before the HANDOVERCOMMAND message is received from the MSC, the result depends on the setting of thehandover_recognized_period parameter.

The bssmap_t8 timer specifies the wait time for the receipt of a successful handover.This is the sum of the time required for all messages to be sent to the mobile plus thetime it takes to access a target and come back, if necessary.

The bssmap_tqho timer specifies the maximum allowed queuing time for a handoverrequest.

The bts_audit timer specifies the wait time for the audit timer for the state on dedicatedchannel.

The bts_audit_response timer specifies the wait time for audit Radio Resource StateMachine (RRSM) call response from the SCCP State Machine (SSM).

bts_escalation

carrier_free_immediate

cbch_1

cbch_2

cbch_3

channel_act

channel_teardown

cipher_comp_ms

ciphering_successful

circuit_reset_ack

clear_cmd_ext_ho

clear_command

The bts_escalation timer specifies how long the BTS can be out of communication withthe BSC before resetting.

The carrier_free_immediate timer specifies the time allowed to free all channels on acarrier when the channels must be freed immediately (regardless of state). This valueshould be eight times greater than the value needed to free a single timeslot.

The cbch_1 timer specifies the wait time for sending BCCH information for the newlyactivated CBCH channel to the deactivation of the old CBCH.

The cbch_2 timer specifies the wait time for updating the CBCH response from RSS.

The cbch_3 timer specifies the wait time for the CBCH activation acknowledgement fromRCI.

The channel_act timer specifies how long the Radio Subsystem (RSS) waits for aconfirmation from the channel coder after sending a CHAN_ACTIVATE request to thechannel coders. This request is sent to the channel coders to activate a channel.

The channel_teardown timer specifies the wait time for channel teardown.

The cipher_comp_ms (and the ciphering_successful) parameters are guard timersthat are used to verify that expected messages are received. If an expected message isnot received within the specified time, the resources associated with the call arereleased.

The ciphering_successful (and the ciphering_comp_ms) parameters are guardtimers that are used to verify that expected messages are received. If an expectedmessage is not received within the specified time, the resources associated with the callare released.

The circuit_reset_ack timer specifies the wait time for the circuit reset� �acknowledgement from internal subsystems. A typical value for this timer is 1000milliseconds.

The clear_cmd_ext_ho timer specifies the wait time for the clear command from theMSC when the MSC sends a Handover command.

The clear_command timer specifies the wait time for the clear command from the MSC.

dealloc_inact

downlink_sync_timer

dynet_retry_time

early_classmark_delay

emerg_reserved

ext_ho_allocation

ext_rtry_cand_prd

flow_control_t1

flow_control_t2

gbl_thrput_period

The dealloc_inact timer specifies the wait time for the deallocation of a channel forwhich a fatal error indication has been received from the BSS. The channel is held forthe specified time in case the connection recovers.

The downlink_sync_timer timer specifies the wait time a Channel Coder Unit (CCU)allows for the downlink TRAU Sync to be lost during a call before generating an errorindication.

The dynet_retry_time timer specifies the amount of time that the BTS waits for aresponse from the BSC when the BTS requests a terrestrial backing source. The valuefor this timer depends on whether satellites are used to connect the BSC to the BTS.

The early_classmark_delay timer specifies how long the BSS delays sending theClassmark Update message to the MSC during Early Classmark sending.

The emerg_reserved timer specifies how long a TCH is reserved for an emergency callaccess. The TCH becomes reserved after an existing call is torn down due to the lack ofTCHs at the time of an emergency call access.

The ext_ho_allocation timer specifies the wait time for handover allocation.

The ext_rtry_cand_prd timer specifies the time between successive attempts for agiven source cell to attempt an inter-BSS handover to a target cell which had previouslyrejected a handover attempt because of congestion.

The flow_control_t1 timer specifies the wait time before the Flow Control mechanismconsiders new overload messages.

The flow_control_t2 timer specifies the wait time before a previously flow control barredaccess class is brought back in service.

The gbl_thrput_period timer specifies the time period to compute the statisticsGBL_UL_DATA_THRPUT and GBL_DL_DATA_THRPUT. These statistics indicate thethroughput of a GBL uplink and downlink.

gprs_smg30_t3192

gprs_t3168

gprs_t3192

handover_recognized_period

ho_ack

ho_allocation

ho_complete

ho_request

ho_successful

hop_count_timer

The gprs_smg30_t3192 timer specifies the mobile timers used by the BTS on the BCCHblocks. It specifies the time that the mobile continues the assigned PDCHs, afterreceiving its last data block and before it returns to monitoring its paging groups.

The gprs_t3168 timer specifies the MS timers used by the BTS on the BCCH blocks.This parameter specifies the wait time for the MS waits to get a Packet UplinkAssignment after sending a Packet Resource Request.

The gprs_t3192 timer specifies the MS timers used by the BTS on BCCH blocks. Thisparameter specifies the time that the MS continues the assigned PDCHs after receivingits last data block and before it returns to monitoring its paging groups.

The handover_recognized_period parameter specifies the per cell periodicity timer forthe minimum period between handover attempts for a BTS queueing for handover. Itsets the minimum period between internal BTS handover messages being generated andthat result in a HANDOVER REQUIRED message being sent from the BSS to the MSC.

In an intra-cell handover, the ho_ack timer specifies the wait time for the BTS/BSCassignment of the target handover channel. If this timer expires before this assignment,the handover attempt fails, the newly assigned channel is freed, and a new handoverprocedure has to start.

The ho_allocation timer specifies the wait time for handover allocation from destinationcell RRSM.

The ho_complete timer specifies the wait time for handover complete from a MS on thetarget cell.

The ho_request timer specifies the wait time for handover request from the MSC afterthe SCCP connection is established.

The ho_successful parameter specifies the wait time for handover complete from targetcell Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).

The hop_count _timer specifies the number of SACCH periods that intercellinterference handovers are counted. If the number of handovers defined by thehop_count parameter occur within the time set by the hop_count_timer, the systemescalates the handover to a RXQUAL handover to another cell.

initial_sync_timer

mode_modify

mode_rr_modify_ack

ms_sapi3_est

neighbor_report_timer

ns_alive_timer

ns_block_timer

ns_reset_period

ns_reset_timer

ns_test_timer

penalty_time

phase_lock_duration

The initial_sync_timer specifies the wait time for a Channel Coder Unit (CCU) toreceive the initial downlink Transcoding and Rate Adaption Unit (TRAU) frame beforegenerating an error indication.

The mode_modify timer specifies the wait time for the MODE MODIFY message to besent from Abis to Physical Layer 1.

The mode_rr_modify_ack timer specifies the wait time for the MODE MODIFYACKNOWLEDGE message from the MS.

The ms_sapi3_est timer specifies the wait time for SAPI 3 SMS establishment from theMS.

The neighbor_report_timer specifies the wait time for the MS for a handover to decodethe BSIC and report on potentially interfering neighbours.

The ns_alive_timer guards the NS Test Procedure between the BSS and the SGSN.

The ns_block_timer guards the NS Blocking and Unblocking Procedures between theBSS and SGSN.

The ns_reset_period timer specifies the period for which the BSS attempts to reset anNSVC using the NS Reset Procedure.

The ns_reset_timer guards the NS Reset Procedure between the BSS and the SGSN.

The ns_test_timer specifies the periodicity of the NSVC test procedure. The NSVC istested every ns_test_timer seconds.

The penalty_time timer specifies how long the value specified by the fieldtemporary_offset is valid.

The phase_lock_duration parameter extends the minimum length of time a GCLK musthold synchronization with an MMS before the GCLK is considered synchronized.

radio_chan_released

register_exp

rf_chan_rel_ack

rr_ny1_rep

rr_t3101

rr_t3103

rr_t3105

rr_t3109

rr_t3111_sd

rr_t3111_tch

rr_t3212

The radio_chan_released timer specifies how long the BSC waits for the BTS torelease a call. This timer starts when one of the following occurs:

The register_exp timer specifies the wait time for the CRM to initiate registration with theBSC.

The rf_chan_rel_ack timer specifies the wait time an RF channel release(acknowledgement) message from the Radio Subsystem (RSS).

The rr_ny1_rep parameter specifies the threshold for the maximum number ofrepetitions for the PHYSICAL INFORMATION message during a handover. Thisparameter is used by RSS Layer 1 process.

The rr_t3101 timer specifies how long the BSS waits for the MS to establish on aStandalone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH) after sending an immediate assignmentmessage.

The rr_t3103 timer specifies how long the BSS waits for an internal handover tocomplete.

The rr_t3105 parameter specifies the repetition between transmissions of the PhysicalInformation messages during the handover procedure. The RSS uses this value tocalculate the number of blocks to skip. This value is sent to the DRI.

The rr_t3109 timer is used during the channel release procedure in case of a radio linktimeout.

The rr_t3111_sd timer specifies the delay for the deactivation of an SDCCH channelafter the disconnection of the main signalling link. The purpose is to allow some time forthe possible repetition of the disconnection of the main signalling link.

Th rr_t311_tch timer specifies the delay for the deactivation of a traffic channel (TCH)after the disconnection of the main signalling link. The purpose is to allow some time forthe possible repetition of the disconnection of the main signalling link.

The rr_t3212 timer governs the MS periodic location update procedure. This timer ispart of the control channel description information parameter.

rtry_cand_prd

sacch_info

sccp_released

sccp_tconn_est

sccp_tiar

sccp_tias

sccp_trel

sm_audit_response

spi

ss7_l2_t1

The rtry_cand_prd timer specifies how long a cell can be marked as congested and cannot accept incoming non-imperative handovers.

The sacch_info timer specifies how long the Radio Subsystem (RSS) must hold systeminformation messages for the SACCH from Call Processing (CP) before it can send thesystem information it has down to the channel coders. The information is sentimmediately if both of the SACCH information messages are received.

The sccp_released timer specifies the wait time for SCCP Released from MSC. Thistimer controls the duration that the BSC waits for the SCCP connection to be released.

The sccp_tconn_est timer specifies the wait time for the SCCP connection confirmationfrom the MSC.

The sccp_tiar timer specifies the receive inactivity control timer.

The sccp_tias timer specifies the send activity control timer.

The sccp_trel timer specifies the wait time for SCCP Release complete.

The sm_audit_response timer specifies the wait time for audit response from switchmanager.

The spi timer specifies the wait time before initiating an internal reset after eitherSubsystem Prohibited (SSP) or Signalling Point Inaccessible (SPI) occurs.

The ss7_l2_t1 timer specifies the alignment ready timer.

ss7_l2_t2

ss7_l2_t3 The ss7_l2_t3 timer specifies the aligned timer.

ss7_l2_t4

ss7_l2_t5

ss7_l2_t6

ss7_l2_t7

ss7_l3_t1

ss7_l3_t12

ss7_l3_t13

ss7_l3_t14

The ss7_l2_t2 timer specifies the not aligned timer.

The ss7_l2t4 timer specifies the emergency proving period timer.

The ss7_l2_t5 timer specifies the sending SIB timer.

The ss7_l2_t6 timer specifies the remote congestion timer.

The ss7_l2_t7 timer specifies the excessive delay of acknowledgement timer. If theerror correction method is set to PCR, the minimum value for this parameter is 0.8seconds.

The ss7_l3_t3 timer specifies the delay to avoid mis-sequencing on changeover timer.

The ss7_l3_t12 timer specifies the uninhibit acknowledgement timer.

The ss7_l3_t13 timer specifies the force uninhibit timer.

The ss7_l3_t14 timer sets the inhibition acknowledgement timer.

ss7_l3_t17

ss7_l3_t2

ss7_l3_t22

ss7_l3_t23

ss7_l3_t4

ss7_l3_t5

ss7_slt_t1

start_ack

static_sync_timer

The ss7_l3_t17 timer specifies the time to wait to avoid oscillation of initial alignmentfailure and link restart timer.

The ss7_l3_t2 timer specifies the wait time for changeover acknowledgement timer.

The ss7_l3_t22 timer specifies the local inhibit test timer.

The ss7_l3_t23 timer specifies the remote inhibit test time

The ss7_l3_t4 timer specifies the waiting for changeback acknowledgement (firstattempt) timer.

The ss7_l3_t5 timer specifies the waiting for changeback acknowledgement (secondattempt) timer.

The ss7_slt_t1 parameter specifies the supervision timer for signalling link testacknowledgement.

The start_ack parameter specifies the BSC wait time for the starting acknowledgementof a single registered BTS during configuration time.

This static_sync_timer specifies the maximum amount of time that is allowed for thechannel coder to transition from initial time alignment to static time alignment. Static timealignment is necessary before the channel coder can process data.

t_stat_info

uplink_sync_timer

valid_candidate_period

The t_stat_info timer specifies the interval between Subsystem Status Test (SST)messages to the MSC.

The uplink_sync_timer specifies how long a Channel Coder Unit (CCU) waits for theurgent alarm pattern to be received before generating an error indication.

The valid_candidate_period timer specifies how long candidates for handovers due tocongestion are valid before querying for new ones.

Valid range Value description Default value

0 to 1000000 60000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 10000 2000

0 to 127 0

0 to 127 0

0 to 1000000 120000

0 to 1000000 30000

1 to 1000 10 (1 second)

1 to 120 3

0 to 1000000 60000

0 to 1000000 30000

1 0.1 seconds 100 milliseconds. 10 1 second 1000 milliseconds.1000 100 seconds 100000 milliseconds

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 1000000 60000

0 to 1000000 40000

0 to 1000000 30000

T20

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000

0 to 100000 30000

The lesser value of 60000 or the bsc_audit timer

minus 1

0, and 30 to 360 60

0 to 1000000 120000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 35000

0 to 10000 10000

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 1000000 70000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 30000

(0 indicates that the BTS does not reset due to loss ofcommunication with the BTS)

0 to 1000000 None

1000 to 3000 1000

150 to 3000 150

0 to 100000 0

0 to 1000000 120000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 4000

0 to 1000000 20000

0 to 1000000 20000

1 to 255 50

500, 1000, 2000, and 4000 500

500, 1000, 2000, and 4000 4000

0, 80, 120, 160, 200, 500, 1000, and 1500 500

2 to 64 (even values only) 2

0 to 1000000 5000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 255 0A value of 0 disables the feature.

1500 to 7000 4000 (4 seconds)

0 to 10000 10000

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 1000000 28000

0 to 255 10

1 to 30 3

1 to 30 3

1 to 250 125

1 to 120 40

1 to 60 30

0 to 31 0

0 to 3600

0 20 seconds1 40 seconds2 60 seconds..30 620 seconds

050 (M-Cell only)

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 120000

0 to 1000000 5000

0 to 200 20

0 to 1000000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 200 60

0 to 1000000 14400

0 to 1000000 14400

0 to 1000000 14400

0 to 255 10

5000 (add_cell default)

0 to 1000000 4000

0 to 10000 2000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 30000

0 to 1000000 30000

4000 to 15000 10000

0 to 1000000 30000

10000 to 1000000 60000

The range of values is dependent upon the value of the

ss7_mode parameter

40000 to 50000 If ss7_mode = 0 (ITU)13000 to 30000 If ss7_mode = 1 (ANSI)

The default value is dependent upon

the value of the ss7_modeparameter.

50000 If ss7_mode = 0

(ITU)13000 If

ss7_mode = 1 (ANSI)

400 to 600 600

80 to 120 100

500 to 2000 1000

500 to1200 850

800 to 1500 1150

800 to 1500 1150

2000 to 3000 2500


ss7_mode parameter




25000 If ss7_mode = 0

(ITU)23000 If

ss7_mode = 1 (ANSI)


ss7_mode parameter




1400 If ss7_mode = 0 (ITU)11500 If

ss7_mode = 1 (ANSI)


ss7_mode parameter




5000 If ss7_mode = 0 (ITU)

5000 If ss7_mode = 1 (ANSI)

800 to 1500 1150

700 to 2000 1400

500 to 1200 850

500 to 1200 850

4000 to 12000 8000

0 to 1000000 30000

1 to 65535 12000


ss7_mode parameter.



the value of the ss7_modeparameter.270000 If

ss7_mode = 0 (ITU)

90000 If ss7_mode = 1

(ANSI)


ss7_mode parameter.



the value of the ss7_modeparameter.270000 If

ss7_mode = 0 (ITU)

90000 If ss7_mode = 1

(ANSI)

0 0 seconds 0 milliseconds1 0.001 second 1 millisecond. 12000 12 seconds 12000 milliseconds.65535 65.535 seconds 65535 milliseconds

0 to 1000000 90000

1000 to 3000 1000

1 to 1000000 4000

Dependencies

None NO

None Yes

None NO

None Yes

None Yes

Must be greater than bts_audit No

None No

No

No

None No

None Yes


The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.


None No

None No

None No

None No

None NO

None No

None No

None No

None No

Must be less than bsc_audit No

None No

No

None No

None No

None No

None No

None No

None No

No

No

None No

Yes

None No

The parameter is only valid for a remote BTS site.

In the command syntax, location must not be 0

(zero).

The ciphering_successful parameter value must be

greater than the cipher_comp_ms parameter

value.

The ciphering_successful parameter value must be

greater than the cipher_comp_ms parameter

value.

This command is only valid for the BSC (location 0).

None No

Yes

No

Yes

None No

None No

No

No

No

Yes

This parameter is not allowed at a stand-alone BSC

or a stand-alone RXCDR. It can be used at a

collocated BSC/BTS or at a BTS.

This parameter is not available unless the containing

site is configured to support Dynamic Allocation and

this option is in operation.The parameter is invalid for the

BSC (location 0).

The Multiband Inter-cell Handover feature must be

enabled.This parameter can only be

viewed at the BSC.

The Congestion Relief feature must be enabled.

The inter_cell_handover_allowed parameter must

be enabled for ECR functionality to work properly.

The flow_control_t1 value must be at least 1000

milliseconds less than the flow_control_t2 value.

The flow_control_t1 value must be at least 1000

milliseconds less than the flow_control_t2 value.


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

None Yes

None No

None No

None No

None No

None Yes


If the parameter smg_gb_vers is less than or equal

to 30, then it is used. Otherwise, gprs_t3192 is

used.



Call queueing must be enabled.MSC h_interval ,

handover_recognized_period

Yes

No

None No

None No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

temporary_offset Yes

Yes

This timer is not allowed at a stand-alone BSC or

RXCDR. It can be used at a collocated BSC/BTS or

at a BTS.The initial_sync_timer is valid

only at sites thatcontain transceivers, such as

BTS sites or collocatedBSC/BTS sites.

The value of the mode_modify_ack CP timer must

be greater than or equal to the RSS timers + 10 ms.

This parameter is valid only if the Concentric Cells

Option is enabled and the inner_zone_alg element

is set to 2.This parameter may not be changed for Horizonoffice

BTS sites.

This parameter can be used only if the GPRS featureis unrestricted.No

This parameter can be used only if the GPRS feature

is unrestricted.


is unrestricted.

This parameter can be used only if the GPRS feature is

unrestricted.


is unrestricted.

This parameter cannot be modified for a GPRS PCU

MMS.

None No

None No

None Yes

rr_t3105 Yes

Yes

None Yes

None Yes

No

No

No

None Yes

The rr_t3101 value must be greater than the

maximum length of time it takes for a Layer 2

establishment attempt.


rr_t3111_sd and the rr_t3111_tch values.





No

None No

None No

None No

No

No

None No

None No

None No

ss7_mode Yes


The inter_cell_handover_allowed parameter must

be enabled for ECR functionality to work properly.

The sccp_tiar timer parameter must be greater than

the sccp_tias timer parameter.The sccp_tiar at the BSS must be

greater than thesccp_tiar at the MSC.

The sccp_tiar timer parameter must be greater than

the sccp_tias timer parameter.The sccp_tiar at the BSS must be

greater than thesccp_tiar at the MSC.

ss7_mode Yes

ss7_mode Yes

None Yes

None Yes

ss7_mode Yes

Yes

None Yes

None Yes

None Yes

None Yes

If pcr_enable is on, ss7_l2_t7 � �must be greater

than or equal to 800 milliseconds.

None Yes

Yes

ss7_mode Yes

ss7_mode Yes

None Yes

None Yes

None Yes

None No

Yes

If pcr_enable is on, ss7_l3_t2 � �must be greater

than or equal to 1400 milliseconds.


is unrestricted.This parameter is not available if

thelocal_maintenance flag is

disabled.

None

Yes

Yes

This parameter is not allowed at a stand-alone BSC

or RXCDR. It can be used at a collocated BSC/BTS

or at a BTS.

The ho_exist_congest parameter must be enabled.


attach_detach 0 or 1

ba_alloc_proc 0 or 1

bs_ag_blks_res

bsic 0 to 63

bvci

Valid range

The attach_detach parameter enables and disables the mandatory International MobileSubscriber Identity (IMSI) attach/detach for the MS.

The ba_alloc_proc parameter enables and disables the reinitialization of the active blockfollowing a change in the broadcast control channel allocation (BA) and the suspension ofsubsequent measurements until the new BA is reported.

The bs_ag_blks_res parameter specifies the number of blocks reserved for accessgrant per 51–multiframes. The number of blocks reserved starting with (and including)block 0 are broadcast in the BCCH. The number of paging blocks available are reducedby the number of blocks reserved for access grant messages.The choice of value is determined by the ratio of MS-originated calls to MS-terminatedcalls.PCH and AGCH share the same TDMA mapping when combined onto a basic physicalchannel. Channels are shared on a block by block basis.

0 to 2 blocks

reserved for

ccch_conf = 1

0 to 7 blocks

reserved for

ccch_conf 1

The bsic parameter specifies the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC).The BSIC is a local colour code that allows an MS to distinguish between differentneighbouring base stations. The BSIC is encoded on the Synchronization Channel.The size of the BSIC is one octet made up of two values: Network Colour Code (NCC). The NCC is three bits and is the same as the Publicland mobile network (PLMN) Colour Code. Base station Colour Code (BCC). The BCC is also three bits.The values for the NCC and BCC may range from 000 to 111.

The bvci parameter specifies a BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier (BVCI). There mustbe one BVCI per cell and one signalling BVCI per BSS. BVCIs are automaticallygenerated by the BSS on creation of a cell.

2 to 65535

ccch_conf

ccch_load_period 1 to 1020

cell_bar_access_class 0 to ffffh

cell_bar_access_switch 0 or 1

cell_bar_qualify 0 or 1

The ccch_conf parameter specifies the organization of the Common Control Channels(CCCH) on the BCCH. This field defines whether the CCCHs are combined with SDCCHand SACCH onto the same basic physical channel. The value depends on the size ofthe cell and on the number of access attempts expected on the cell.

0, 1, 2, 4, and 6

The ccch_load_period parameter specifies the number of TDMA multiframes betweensuccessive calculations of the RACH load during overload conditions.

The cell_bar_access_class parameter specifies access classes that are barred (or notbarred) access to the PLMN. A channel request is initiated only when the access classof a mobile is “not barred”. The list of authorized access classes is broadcast on theBCCH by way of SYSTEM INFORMATION messages. Also broadcast are the classesthat have access to emergency calls.

The cell_bar_access_switch parameter specifies whether or not subscribers are barredaccess to a cell in idle mode.Emergency calls (user class 10) are not, and cannot be, barred.

The cell_bar_qualify parameter is used by the network to control MS cell selection.

cell_reselect_hysteresis 0 to 7

cell_reselect_offset 0 to 63

cell_reselect_param_ind 0 or 1

0 or 1

dl_dtx_voice_data 0 to 3

The cell_reselect_hysteresis parameter specifies the hysteresis level for cellreselection into a different location area. The new cell is selected only if the path losscriterion parameter (C1) on the new cell exceeds C1 on the old cell by a minimum ofvalue assigned to the cell_reselect_hysteresis parameter.Differences in received signal levels from 0 to 14 dB (in 2 dB increments) are used forcell reselection.

The cell_reselect_offset parameter specifies a C2 offset value for the MS. C2 is thereselection priority assigned to a cell which can be broadcast on the BCCH of each cell.When more than one cell is available for reselection, the MS reselects the cell with thehighest C2 value.Lower C2 values discourage fast moving MSs from selecting a specific cell. Highervalues encourage MSs to reselect a specific cell.

The cell_reselect_parameter_ind parameter specifies whether the C2 parameters(cell_bar_qualify, cell_reselect_offset, temporary_offset, and penalty_time) are broadcastto the MS by the network in the system information messages.

channel_reconfiguration_switch

The channel_reconfiguration_switch parameter enables and disables dynamicchannel reconfiguration (reassignment) of traffic channels to Standalone DedicatedControl Channels (SDCCHs).The Cell Resource Manager (CRM) may attempt to reconfigure an idle TCH into anSDCCH if a high proportion of SDCCHs are in use and additional SDCCH requests arereceived. The reconfiguration process continues until the number of idle SDCCHsreaches the sdcch_need_high_water_mark value.The reconfiguration process stops when the number of idle TCHs goes below thetch_full_need_low_water_mark value or when the total number of SDCCHs configuredreaches the max_number_of sdcchs value.

The dl_dtx_voice_data parameter specifies the option for downlink discontinuoustransmission (DTX) for speech and voice.

dpc

dr_allowed 0 or 1

dr_chan_mode_modify 0 or 1

dr_preference 0 or 1

dr_standard_congest 0 or 1

The dpc parameter specifies the Destination Point Code (DPC). The range of valuesdepends on the setting of the ss7_mode parameter.The system checks the value of the opc and ss7_mode variables and compares them tothe value for ss7_mode. If the ranges are not compatible, the system rejects thechanges and displays the following message:COMMAND ACCEPTED: WARNING: When opc equals dpc, communication with MSC isimpossible.

0 to 16383 If ss7_mod

e = 0 (CCITT)

0 to 16777215

If ss7_mod

e =1 (Bellcore)

The dr_allowed parameter enables or disables the Directed Retry option.

The dr_chan_mode_modify parameter determines if the channel mode modifyprocedure will follow a successful handover of a Phase 1 MS in which the channel modechanged to full rate speech. The BSS reads this parameter only in the case of asuccessful handover in which the channel mode changed, the MS is Phase 1, and thenew channel mode is full rate speech.Changing the channel mode during a handover occurs only during a Directed Retryprocedure. For this to occur, either an external Directed Retry handover has successfullycompleted to this BSS or an intra-BSS Directed Retry handover has successfullycompleted and either the database parameter dr_standard_congest ordr_ho_during_assign is enabled in the source cell.

The dr_preference parameter enables or disables the Directed Retry procedures.

The dr_standard_congest parameter enables or disables the standard Directed Retrycongestion procedure is enabled in the cell. The procedure initiates a handover ifpossible for a call needing a TCH in the case of congestion.This parameter will be copied if the copy_cell command is used.

dtx_required 0 to 2

egsm_bcch_sd

ext_range_cell

The dtx_required parameter specifies the MS capability to use discontinuoustransmission (DTX). Enabling this feature helps to reduce interference and prolongbattery life.

The egsm_bcch_sd parameter specifies whether or not the cell is configured for bothBCCH carriers and the placement of SDCCH channels for the Extended GSM (EGSM)cell.

0 or 10

Disabled1 Enabled

The ext_range_cell parameter enables or disables the Extended Range Cell feature at aCell.

0 to 20

Extended Range

disabled for the

cell1

Extended Range is enabled

as a boundary

cell2

Extended Range is enabled

as an isolated

cell (rural area)

frequency_type

gsm_cell_id_format 0 to 2

layer_number 0 to 2

max_number_of_sdcchs 0 to 48

The frequency_type parameter specifies the frequency type of a cell.

1 pgsm2 egsm

4 dcs1800

8 pcs1900

The gsm_cell_id_format parameter specifies the format of the GSM Cell Identificationsent by the Call Processor (CP) to the switch.

The layer_number parameter specifies the serving cell as being a macrocell, microcell,or picocell.When an RXQUAL handover condition exists, the system attempts to handover a call inthe microcell layer to another cell in the microcell layer.This parameter specifies the layer for a cell.

The max_number_of_sdcchs parameter specifies the maximum number (limit) ofSDCCHs that may be reached with the reconfiguration process. It determines themaximum limit of the SDCCHs that the CRM will maintain.

0 to 50

max_q_length_sdcch 0 to 50

max_retran 0 to 3

max_tx_bts 0 to 21

max_tx_ms

max_q_length_full_rate_channel

The max_q_length_full_rate_channel parameter specifies the maximum number ofMSs that may wait in queue for a full rate channel assignment.If an idle traffic channel is not available at the channel assignment instant, the networkmay place the traffic channel request in queue.If the queue length is 0, queuing is not allowed.

The max_q_length_sdcch parameter specifies the maximum length of the queue forStand-alone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH) requests.

The max_retran parameter specifies the maximum channel request retransmission valuefor MSs. After a channel request is initiated, T3120 (timer) begins; if the number ofretransmissions does not exceed the maximum retransmissions received on the BCCH,the channel request message is repeated. The maximum retransmission value may alsobe defined for the cell reselection.

The max_tx_bts parameter specifies the maximum output power for a BTS within itspower class. This can be used to establish a cell boundary. A BTS is capable ofreducing its power in a range of 21 steps of 2 dBm per step.

The max_tx_ms parameter specifies the maximum MS (Mobile Subscriber) outputpower. Regardless of the power class of the MS, the MS is not told to use a higheroutput power.The value should be chosen to balance the up and down links in a cell.This parameter is also used in the power budget calculation.

5 to 39 PGSM

and EGSM (Odd

values only)

0 to 36 DCS1800

(Even values only)

0 to 32,33 PCS1900

(Even values

only and value 33)

mb_tch_congest_thres 1 to 101

ms_txpwr_max_cell

ms_txpwr_max_def

The mb_tch_congest_thres parameter specifies the level of overall TCH utilization byany MS in a given Cell, at which a MultiBand MS is redirected to the preferred band (asset by band_preference). The parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The ms_txpwr_max_cell parameter specifies the maximum MS transmit power in eachneighbour cell.

5 to 39 (Odd

values only) PGSM

and EGSM0 to 36 (Even values only)

DCS18000 to 32,

33 (Even values

only and value 33) PCS1900

The ms_txpwr_max_def parameter specifies the default value for thems_txpwr_max_cell parameter.

5 to 39 (Odd

values only) PGSM

and EGSM0 to 36 (Even values only)

DCS18000 to 32,

33 (Even values

only and value 33) PCS1900

multiband_reporting 0 to 3

ncc_of_plmn_allowed 0 to 255

neighbor_journal 0 or 1

The multiband_reporting parameter specifies the number of cells of each supportedband the system includes in the MS Measurement Report.

The ncc_of_plmn_allowed parameter is a bit mapped value which specifies whichNetwork Colour Codes (NCCs) are allowed on specific broadcast control channels(BCCH carriers).

The neighbor_journal parameter enables or disables neighbour journaling.If journaling is enabled: There is no warm up period for neighbours. All neighbor information is paddedwith 0’s. Averaging and power budget calculations will begin immediately. If a previously reported neighbor is missing in the measurement report, a 0 rxlev isused for the neighbor.If journaling is disabled: There is a warmup period of the surround cell hreqave before power budgetcalculations begin. The last received rxlev for the unreported neighbor is used.

num_audit_retries 0 to 5

num_emerg_access

num_emerg_rejected

num_emerg_tch_kill

num_emerg_term_sdcch

number_sdcchs_preferred

opc

The num_audit_retries parameter specifies the number of times CP processes auditeach other with regard to a particular connection. If an audit fails, it repeats up to thevalue specified by num_audit_retries, before a particular call is cleared by the auditingprocess.This parameter provides a means of differentiating between glitches on a link and acomplete link failure.

The num_emerg_access parameter enables or disables the collection of statistics inrelation to the number of active TCH calls terminated to allow an emergency call to takethe specified GSM Cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

offon

The num_emerg_rejected parameter enables or disables the collection of statistics inrelation to the number of emergency calls rejected because of a lack of resources for theselected GSM Cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

offon

The num_emerg_tch_kill parameter enables or disables the collection of statistics inrelation to the number of active TCH calls terminated to allow an emergency call to thechannel on the specified GSM cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

offon

The num_emerg_term_sdcch parameter enables or disables the collection of statisticsin relation to the number of emergency calls that are terminated after being allocated aSDCCH but could not be allocated a TCH for the specified GSM cell.An index value of 0 must be used for this element.

offon

The number_sdcchs_preferred parameter specifies the preferred number ofStandalone Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCHs) that the reconfiguration algorithmtries to maintain.When channel reconfiguration is enabled, the CRM attempts to maintain the preferrednumber of SDCCHs for Immediate Assignments.The reconfiguration either of consist idle TCHs being converted to SDCCHs or freeSDCCHs being converted to TCHs.

4 to 448 to 48

The opc parameter specifies the Originating Point Code (OPC). The values for the OPCare stored as a 14-bit binary code.If the opc parameter is set to equal the dpc, the system issues a warning:COMMAND ACCEPTED: WARNING: When opc equals dpc, communication with MSC isimpossible.

0 to 16383

0 to 16777215

pwrc 0 or 1

0 to 50

rach_load_period 1 to 1020

rach_load_threshold 0 to 1000

rach_load_type 0 or 1

0 to 254

1 to 255

rf_res_ind_period 1 to 127

The pwrc parameter specifies whether or not the Broadcast Control Channels (BCCH)measurement are included in the averaged value of hopping frequencies.

queue_management_information

This parameter specifies the maximum number of MSs that may wait in a queue forchannel assignment. A value of 0 indicates that queueing is not allowed.

The rach_load_period parameter specifies the number of TDMA multiframes betweensuccessive calculations of the RACH load during the non-overload conditions.

The rach_load_threshold parameter specifies the threshold for RACH load. If thecalculated RACH load exceeds this threshold, an overload condition is signalled and anaccess class is barred at the cell where the overload is occurring.If the RACH load exceeds rach_load_threshold, an overload indication is sent to CallProcessing which may result in an access class being barred. The RACH load may be

The rach_load_type parameter specifies the RACH loading calculation method.

report_resource_tch_f_high_water_mark

The report_resource_tch_f_high_water_mark parameter specifies the high needthreshold of a full rate traffic channel (TCH) for the resource indication procedure. Whenthe number of available (idle) full rate TCHs falls below this threshold, the internalresource indication timer starts and the resource indication message is sent to the MSC.That is, the Resource Request message received from the MSC is indicating aspontaneous mode.

report_resource_tch_f_low_water_mark

The report_resource_tch_f_low_water_mark parameter specifies the low needthreshold of a full rate traffic channel (TCH) for the resource indication procedure. Whenthe number of available (idle) full rate TCHs rises above this threshold, the internalresource indication timer stops (if it is running). That is, the Resource Request messagereceived from the MSC is indicating a spontaneous mode.

The rf_res_ind_period parameter specifies the RF resource indication period. Duringthis period, the idle channel is categorized. The idle channel categories are reported tothe CRM by the RSS. The idle channel categories are: X1, X2, X3, X4, and X5.

rxlev_access_min 0 to 63

rxlev_min_def 0 to 63

1 to 39

10 to 48

0 to 4

The rxlev_access_min parameter specifies the minimum received signal level (dBm)required for an MS to access the system.The range –110 dBm to –47 dBm is used to set the minimum received signal level whichin turn is used in path loss criterion parameter, C1. This should be set to a valuecorresponding to a signal level at which a call can be maintained in a particularenvironment.

The rxlev_min_def parameter specifies the default value for rxlev_min_cell.

sdcch_need_high_water_mark

The sdcch_need_high_water_mark parameter specifies the number of idle SDCCHs totrigger reconfiguration of traffic channels to SDCCHs.If dynamic reconfiguration is enabled and the total number of idle SDCCHs is less thanthe value of the sdcch_need_high_water_mark, the CRM tries to reconfigure TCHs inorder to make more SDCCHs. The total number of SDCCHs can not exceed the value ofthe max_number_of_sdcchs parameter.

sdcch_need_low_water_mark

The sdcch_need_low_water_mark parameter specifies the number of idle SDCCHs totrigger reconfiguration of SDCCHs (from previous TCH to SDCCH reconfigurations) backto TCHs.When dynamic channel reconfiguration is enabled, and when the number of idleSDCCHs available at a point in time goes above this value, reconfiguration of SDCCHsto TCHs is triggered as long as the total number of SDCCHs after reconfiguration wouldstay above the number_sdcchs_preferred value.

sdcch_tch_band_reassign_delay

The sdcch_tch_band_reassign_delay parameter specifies the number ofmeasurement report periods that the RSS waits before responding to CRM if the MSdoes not report any preferred band neighbour.This parameter applies to multiband MSs only.Use of this parameter may cause a delay in call setup of up to two seconds.

second_asgnmnt 0 or 1

sms_dl_allowed 0 or 1

sms_tch_chan 0 to 2

sms_ul_allowed 0 or 1

surround_cell 0 to 255

0 to 255

threshold 0 to 255

The second_asgnmnt parameter enables or disables the Second Assignmentprocedure. With this parameter enabled, the RRSM initiates a second assignmentprocedure if it receives an assignment failure from the MS for the first assignment. Insituations where first TCH assignment fails and the MS successfully recovers to theSDCCH, this parameter enables a second TCH assignment attempt.

The sms_dl_allowed parameter enables or disables downlink (MS terminated) ShortMessage Service (SMS).

The sms_tch_chan parameter specifies the logical radio channel for the Short MessageService (SMS) transfer in the event of a call being present on a traffic channel. TheFACCH is tried first, and if this fails, the SACCH is used. If the current radio channel isan SDCCH, the SDCCH will be used.

The sms_ul_allowed parameter enables or disables uplink (MS originated) ShortMessage Service (SMS).

The surround_cell parameter specifies the averaging parameter for a serving cell’sneighbour cells. The system uses this parameter to determine which neighbour cell tohand off to.The chg_act_alg_data surround_cell command is used to modify the value of thisparameter.

tch_full_need_low_water_mark

The tch_full_need_low_water_mark parameter specifies the low need water mark usedby the Cell Resource Manager (CRM) to determine the need for reconfiguration of fullrate traffic channels (TCHs) to SDCCHs.This parameter specifies the minimum number of TCHs the system attempts to maintainwhen dynamic reconfiguration is enabled.If the total number of idle SDCCHs falls below the value of thesdcch_need_high_water_mark, the CRM tries to reconfigure TCHs in order to makemore SDCCHs. For a TCH to be reconfigured, the number of TCHs must be greaterthan the value of the tch_full_need_low_water_mark parameter.

The threshold parameter specifies the number of times that the Cell Resource Manager(CRM) attempts to assign a Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) number beforerejecting the request.

timing_advance_period 0 to 31

ts_alloc_flag 0 or 1

tsc_update_method 0 to 2

use_neighbor_pbgt_hreqave 0 or 1

wait_indication_parameters 0 to 255

The timing_advance_period parameter specifies the interval between timing advancechanges.The interval should be greater than or equal to (n8 – p8 + 1) x hreqavex/2.Where: x equals:– 1 (lower threshold of RXLEV),– 2 (upper threshold of RXLEV),– 3 (lower threshold of RXQUAL), or– 4 (upper threshold of RXQUAL). n equals the values assigned for decision_1_ny where y is a value from 1 to 4. p equals the values assigned for decision_1_py where y is a value from 1 to 4. hreqave is the number of measurements from the MS that are used in calculatingone average.

The ts_alloc_flag parameter alters the E1/T1 timeslot allocation on links that areadjacent to a ts_switch (pseudo site).This parameter is only used when RSL or RTF devices are equipped.Changing this parameter does not alter the timeslot mapping of RSLs and RTFs that arealready equipped; it affects the way timeslots are allocated for subsequently equippeddevices.

The tsc_update_method parameter specifies the method for updating timeslots whenthe BSIC is changed. The available methods are: Update the BCCH/CCCH timeslots. Update all timeslots on the BCCH carrier. Update all timeslots on all carriers of cell.

The use_neighbor_pbgt_hreqave parameter indicates whether the per cell or perneighbour hreqave will be used for the pbgt>ho_margin trigger assignment.

The wait_indication_parameters parameter specifies the MS timer (T3122).For an MS origination with no channel available, the MS is sent an IMMEDIATEASSIGNMENT REJECT message in an unacknowledged mode on the CCCH. Themessage contains the request reference and a wait indication. The MS does not make anew request in the same cell until the timer expires.

Value description

0

0

0

NONE

NONE

Default value

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Reinitialization disabled1 Reinitialization enabled

The range of values depends on the value of the ccch_confparameter:


Hex = 00h to 3FhDecimal = 0 to 63

See the tables “Base Station Identity Code HexadecimalValues” and “Base Station Identity Code Decimal Values”

tables.

0, 1, 2, 4, and 6

1 to 1020 40

0 to ffffh 0

0

0

0 Cell is not barred1 Cell is barred

0 Normal priority cell1 Low priority cell

NONE

0

0

0

0

Represents the signal level differences as shown below:0 0 dB1 2 dB2 4 dB3 6 dB4 8 dB

5 10 dB6 12 dB7 14 Db

0 0 dB1 2 dB2 4 dB

.

.

.63 126 dB

0 Do not broadcast cell reselection parameters onthe BCCH of the cell

1 Broadcast cell reselection parameters on theBCCH of the cell

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 DTX enabled for speech / disabled for non-transparent data1 DTX disabled for speech / disabled for non-transparent data2 DTX disabled for speech / enabled for non-transparent data3 DTX enabled for speech / enabled for non-transparent data

NONE

1

0

0

0


0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

2

0

0

0 Permitted (MS may use DTX)1 Required (MS must use DTX)

2 Disallowed (MS must not use DTX)



1 Extended Range is enabled as a boundary cell2 Extended Range is enabled as an isolated cell

(rural area)

NONE

1

0

NONE

1 pgsm2 egsm

4 dcs18008 pcs1900

0 Whole Cell Global Identification (CGI)1 Location Area Code (LAC), and Cell Identity (CI)

2 Cell Identity (CI)

0 Macrocell1 Microcell2 Picocell

Valid values depend on the value of ccch_conf.If ccch_conf = 1, the values must be in multiples of 8 with an

offset of 4 (such as 0, 4, 12,...,44).If ccch_conf 1, the values must be in multiples of 8 with

an offset of 0 (such as 0, 8, 16,...48).

0

NONE

NONE

0

0 Maximum [1] retransmission1 Maximum [2] retransmissions2 Maximum [4] retransmissions3 Maximum [7] retransmissions



None

None

(The value 101 indicates there are no resources leftto allocate).

100 (The value 100 indicates

an attempt to

use the last

resource).





0

255

0

0 Normal reporting of the six strongest neighbour cells withknown and allowed NCC part of the BSIC, irrespective of the

band used.1 Report the strongest neighbour cell, with known and allowed

NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in theneighbour cell list, excluding the frequency band of the servingcell. The remaining positions in the measurement report shall

be used for reporting Cells in the band of the serving Cell. Any

still remaining positions will be used to report the nextstrongest identified neighbours in other bands irrespective of

the band used.2 Report the two strongest cells, with known and allowed NCCpart of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the neighbourcell list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Theremaining positions in the measurement report shall be used


used.3 Report the three strongest cells, with known and allowed

NCCpart of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the neighbourcell list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Theremaining positions in the measurement report shall be used


used.

The following table is a representation of the bit mapping of the ncc_of_plmn_allowed

parameter. When a bit is set to 1, the corresponding NCC will be allowed. When a bit is

set to 0, the corresponding NCC will not be allowed.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

1

off

off

off

off

NONE







4 if ccch_conf equals 1;

8 if ccch_conf not equal

to 1

0 to 16383 If ss7_mode = 0 (ITU-TSS)0 to 16777215 If ss7_mode = 1 (ANSI)

1

50

16

NONE

2

12

10

0 Include BCCH measurement1 Do not include BCCH measurement

1000 (Disables

flow control)

0 Percentage of RACH opportunities used1 Percentage of total RACHs which are incorrect

(collisions)

0

15

2

12

0

Represents dBm as shown below:0 -110 dBm and lower

1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..

63 -47 dBm and higher

0

0

2

NONE

255

7

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 BSS_ALGORITHM1 FACCH always used2 SACCH always used

0 Disabled1 Enabled

4

0

0

0

5

Mapped to SACCH multiframes0 0 SACCH multiframes1 2 SACCH multiframes2 4 SACCH multiframes

. ..


0 Use existing algorithm1 Use new algorithm

0 Update the BCCH/CCCH timeslots1 Update all timeslots on the BCCH carrier2 Update all timeslots on all carriers of cell

0 Disabled1 Enabled

Dependencies

none YES

NONE YES

ccch_conf YES

NONE YES

YES



A BVCI cannot be modified if gprs_enabled is set forthe cell.

YES

YES

cell_bar_access_switch YES

NONE YES

YES

If ccch_conf = 0, 2, 4, or 6, values for the followingparameters must meet specific criteria:– number_sdcchs_preferred must be inmultiples of 8 with no offset (divisible by

8) (that is, 0, 8, 16,...,48)– number_sdcchs_preferred must be

less than or equal tosdcch_need_low_water_mark.

– The minimum number of sdcchs mustbe divisible by 8.

– max_number_of_sdcchs must bedivisible by 8.

– 0 bs_ag_blks_res 7If ccch_conf = 1, values for the following parameters

must meet specific criteria:– number_sdcchs_preferred must be inmultiples of 8, with an offset of 4 (that is,

0,4,12,...,44 )– The minimum number of sdcchs must

be a multiple of 8 (+4).– max_number_of_sdcchs must be a

multiple of 8 (+4).– 0 bs_ag_blks_res 2

Enabling of CBCH is not permitted (cbch-enabled =1) if no AGCH is reserved in a non-combined cell(bs-ag-blks-res = 0 and ccch-conf is other than 1).This parameter can be used with the GPRS feature

unrestricted as follows:– Set to 0, seven PDCHs are supported

for a BCCH carrier.– Set to 1, seven PDCHs are supported

for a BCCH carrier.– Set to 2, six PDCHs are supported for a

BCCH carrier.– Set to 4, five PDCHs are supported for a

BCCH carrier.– Set to 6, four PDCHs are supported for

a BCCH carrier.The GPRS timeslots on the GPRS carrier must have

the same FHI.GPRS channels must have the same training

sequence codes.If GPRS is unrestricted for a cell, attempts to modifyccch_conf are rejected if the required timeslots are

configured as GPRS timeslots.

This parameter must be greater than or equal to therach_load_period.

This parameter cannot be changed if thecell_reselect_param_ind parameter does not equal

1.

C1 (path loss criterion) YES

YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

NO

This parameter may not be changed if thecell_reselect_parm_ind parameter is not equal to 1.

The dl_dtx_voice_data parameter affects speechonly if dnlk_vad_dtx is enabled.

This parameter is only valid at the BSC (location = 0). YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

This parameter can only be modified if: either the Directed Retry option is available,

and the neighbour is placed on the SACCH list

and the neighbour is external.

Requires the Directed Retry option.This parameter can be changed only at the BSC.

dr_standard_congestdr_ho_during_assign

Requires the Directed Retry option.This parameter can only be changed at the BSC.

Requires the Directed Retry option. Directed Retrymust be on.

dr_preference must 0The MSC may need to increase the timer waiting forthe Assignment Complete message from the BSS


to the Directed Retry procedure if themsc_preference parameter indicates that directedretry is supported within the BSS (not across the

A-interface) when the dr_standard_congestparameter is enabled.

NONE YES

YES

YES

The egsm_bcch_sd parameter can be disabled onlyif:

The BCCH carrier is not in the GSM Extensionband.

The sd_load parameter is 0 for all carriers inthe Cell.

If the hopping systems (both enabled anddisabled) do not contain a combination of

PGSM and GSM extension band frequencies. If the neighbour BCCH frequencies are not in

the GSM extension band.The egsm_bcch_sd parameter can be enabled only

if the cell is an EGSM frequency cell.

The ext_range_cell parameter cannot be changed ifthe Extended Range Cells feature is restricted.The number of extended range timeslots on theBCCH RTF must support the BCCH, CCCH, andSDCCH channels as these channels are always

extended.ms_max_range must be less than or equal to 63 for

a normal range cell. If ext_range_cell is enabled,the maximum value of ms_max_range increases to

219.max_number_sdcchs must be less than or equal to

20 when Extended Range is enabled.Baseband hopping systems can only be configured

among timeslots of the same type, such as extendedor normal.

If frequency hopping systems is enabled in anExtended Range Cell, all frequency hopping

indicators for the timeslots in the BCCH carriershould be set to “255” (in hexadecimal, 0xff).

This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice BTS,M-Cellcity, M-Cellarena or M-Cellarenamacro sites.

YES

This parameter can be set only at the BSC. YES

The Microcellular feature must be unrestricted. YES

YES

If the Infrastructure Sharing Homogeneous Cabinetfeature is not enabled, the frequency_type for every

cabinet and cell at a site must be the same.If the Infrastructure Sharing Homogeneous Cabinet

feature is enabled, but the Infrastructure SharingHeterogeneous feature is disabled, the cells at a site

must have the same single frequency type as thecabinet they correlate to. However, the cabinets at

the site may be of different frequency typesIf both the Infrastructure Sharing HomogeneousCabinet feature and the Infrastructure Sharing

Heterogeneous feature are enabled, the cells at asite may have different frequency types and cabinetsmay support multiple frequency types. However, thecell frequency must be supported by the cabinet the

cell is correlated to.If inner_zone_alg is set to indicate Dual Band Cells,the following two dependencies are enforced: (1) ifsecondary_freq_type is set to EGSM or PGSM, thefrequency_type may be set only to DCS 1800; (2) if

secondary_freq_type is DCS 1800,frequency_type may be set only to PGSM or

EGSM.Cell and cabinet frequency types must be allowed atthe BSS as per the freq_types_allowed command.

For combined channel configurations, the values canbe 4, 12, 20, 28 SDs

For non-combined channel configurations, the valuescan be 8, 16, 24, 32 SDs

YES

YES

NONE YES

frequency_type YES

YES





The range and default values ofmstxpwr_max_inner depends on this parameter. Ifthe range or default value of max_tx_ms changes,

mstxpwr_max_inner must also be updated, to avalue less than or equal to max_ts_ms.

YES

ms_txpwr_max_def YES

ms_txpwr_max_cell YES

The parameter can be set only if S the Congestion Relief feature is unrestricted

(ho_exist_congest element must beenabled).

S mb_preference element must be enabled.S band_preference_mode must be set to 6

(the mode which triggers when a Cell iscongested).

S mb_tch_congest_thres must be less thanor equal to tch_congest_prevent_thres.

YES

0 to 255 (or 0 to FFh in Hex) YES

NONE YES

The Multiband Intercell Handover feature must beenabled.

NONE YES

NONE NO

NONE NO

NONE NO

NONE NO

YES

YES

The value of this parameter must be less than orequal to the max_number_of_sdcchs.

The valid range for this parameter depends on thevalue of ccch_conf.

The value of opc depends on the values ofss7_mode .


NONE YES

YES

YES

YES

NONE YES

YES

YES

NONE YES

The sum of (max_q_length_full_rate_channel +max_q_length_sdcch) must be less than or equal to


This parameter must be less than or equal toccch_load_period.

If rach_load_type is 1, then the units for thisparameter is (# correct RACH accesses/# incorrect

RACH accesses).If rach_load_type is 0, then the units for this

parameter is (# correct RACH access/# possibleRACH accesses).

Must be less thanreport_resource_tch_f_low_water_mark

Must be greater thanreport_resource_tch_f_high_water_mark

NONE YES

YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

YES

Each step represents 1 dBm as shown below:0 -110 dBm and lower

1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..


The Multiband Intercell Handover feature must beunrestricted.

This parameter applies only to the BSC. YES


The SMS Point to Point feature must be unrestricted. NO


decision_1_p_bgt_rxlev_av_h YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

hreqave, n8, p8 YES

YES

YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

This parameter cannot be altered unless theAggregate Abis feature is enabled.


No RTFs are equipped (tsc_update_method mustfirst be set before RTFs can be equipped in the

script). Equip RTF verifies the TSC values based onthis setting.



adap_ho_alt_trigger_rxqual

adap_ho_pbgt

adap_ho_rxlev

adap_ho_rxqual

adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_dl

adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_ul

adap_trigger_pbgt

adap_trigger_rxlev_dl

The adap_ho_alt_trigger_rxqual parameter specifies whether the system usesalternative trigger values for adaptive quality handovers for a cell which is frequencyhopping.If adaptive handovers are enabled for rxqual, this parameter enables the use of thehopping thresholds for calls that are frequency hopping.

The adap_ho_pbgt parameter specifies whether the system allows adaptive powerbudget handovers. The cumulative area for the adaptive power budget handovers canbe defined as “per cell” or “per neighbor”.At each measurement report, the cumulative area are updated and compared to acumulative trigger. If the area is greater than the cumulative power budget (pbgt) triggera need for a handover is recognized.

The adap_ho_rxlev parameter specifies whether the system allows adaptive receivelevel handovers.At each measurement report the cumulative area are updated and compared to acumulative trigger. If the area is greater than the cumulative power adaptive receive level(rxlev) trigger a need for a handover is recognized.

The adap_ho_rx_qual parameter specifies whether the system allows adaptive qualityhandovers.At each measurement report the cumulative area is updated and compared to acumulative trigger. If the area is greater than the cumulative power adaptive quality(rxqual) trigger a need for a handover is recognized.

The adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_dl parameter specifies the trigger threshold for downlinkrxqual for calls which are frequency hopping.

The adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_ul parameter specifies the trigger threshold for uplinkrxqual for calls which are frequency hopping.

The adap_trigger_pbgt parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level for adaptivepower budget handovers.When the threshold set by adap_trigger_pbgt is exceeded, the system triggers ahandover to a better cell.

The adap_trigger_rxqual_dl parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level foradaptive receive level downlink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs a downlinkstrength handover.

adap_trigger_rxlev_ul

adap_trigger_rxqual_dl

adap_trigger_rxqual_ul

adap_trigger_pbgt_nbr

band_preference

The adap_trigger_rxlev_ul parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level for adaptivereceive level uplink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs an uplinkstrength handover.

The adap_trigger_rxqual_dl parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level foradaptive rxqual downlink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs a downlinkquality handover.

The adap_trigger_rxqual_ul parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level foradaptive rxqual uplink handovers.When the threshold set by this parameter is exceeded, the system performs an uplinkquality handover.

The adap_trigger_pbgt_nbr parameter specifies the cumulative trigger level for theadaptive handover power budget algorithm.When the threshold is set by adap_trigger_pbgt_nbr is exceeded, the system triggers ahandover to a better cell.

The band_preference parameter displays the frequency bands that the cell prefers touse for handovers and specifies the destination frequency band for intercell handovers.

band_preference_mode

bounce_protect_margin

The band_preference_mode parameter specifies the method the system uses toprogram a MultiBand MS with the preferred frequency band for a given cell in the BSS.

The bounce_protect_margin parameter, in conjunction with the ho_margin_cellparameter, specifies the level by which a target cell must exceed the serving cell.This parameter prevents continuous handover bouncing between cells due to RXQUALlevel and congestion reasons.

coincident_cell

The coincident_cell parameter specifies the cell that is coincident to the cell specified inthe chg_cell_element coincident_mb prompt or the disp_cell command.

coincident_mb

coincident_offset

congest_ho_margin

The coincident_mb parameter specifies the ability of a BTS to execute the CoincidentMultiBand Handover option.

The coincident_offset parameter enables and disables the configuration of an additionaloffset to the ho_margin value between a cell and its coincident cell. The system usesthe coincident_offset value when a handover from a MultiBand MS is based on thereceive level for the serving cell.

The congest_ho_margin parameter specifies the margin of a congestion handover. Tomake it easier to handover to this neighbour in the case of congestion in the current cell,this parameter value should be less that the value of the handover margin(s).To disable congestion handovers to this neighbour, set the congestion handover marginto the maximum value.

decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_h

decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_ih

decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_p

decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_h

decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_p


This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to make the handover decisions for downlink signal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handoveralgorithm data.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to make handover decisions for downlink signal interference.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to generate power control changes due to downlink signal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to generate handover decisions due to downlink receive quality(rxqual).This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

This parameter specifies the bin number containing the measurement averagingalgorithm data used to generate power control changes due to downlink receive quality(rxqual).This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

These parameters specify N1 and P1 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N1 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions toincrease uplink and downlink power. P1 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If a least P1averages out of N1 averages are lower than RSS handover threshold l_rxlev_ul_p(uplink) or RSS handover threshold l_rxlev_dl_p (downlink), the corresponding uplink ordownlink power must be increased.





These parameters specify N2 and P2 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N2 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions todecrease uplink and downlink power. P2 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P2averages out of N2 averages are greater than RSS handover threshold u_rxlev_ul_p(uplink) or RSS handover threshold u_rxlev_dl_p (downlink), the corresponding uplink ordownlink transmit power (txpwr) must be decreased.

These parameters specify N3 and P3 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N3 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions toincrease uplink and downlink power. P3 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P3averages out of N3 averages are greater (worse quality) than RSS handover thresholdl_rxqual_ul_p (uplink) or RSS handover threshold l_rxqual_dl_p (downlink), thecorresponding uplink or downlink transmit power (txpwr) must be increased.

These parameters specify N4 and P4 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N4 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in decisions todecrease uplink and downlink power. P4 is the number of samples in the processedmeasurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P4averages out of N4 averages are lower (better quality) than RSS handover thresholdu_rxqual_ul_p (uplink) or RSS handover threshold u_rxqual_dl_p (downlink), thecorresponding uplink or downlink transmit power (txpwr) must be decreased.

These parameters specify N5 and P5 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N5 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in handoverdecisions. P5 is the number of samples in the processed measurement (process)relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P5 averages out of N5 averagesare lower than RSS handover threshold l_rxlev_ul_h (uplink) or RSS handover thresholdl_rxlev_dl_h (downlink), a handover might be required.




decision_1_ncell_rxlev_av_h_calc


These parameters specify N6 and P6 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N6 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process used in handoverdecisions. P6 is the number of samples in the processed measurement (process)relative to the (averaging) algorithm in place. If at least P6 averages out of N6 averagesare greater (worse quality) than RSS handover threshold l_rxqual_ul_h (uplink) or RSShandover threshold l_rxqual_dl_h (downlink), a handover may be needed.

These parameters specify N7 and P7 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N7 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process. P7 is the number ofsamples in the processed measurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm inplace.If at least P7 averages out of N7 averages are greater than RSS handover thresholdu_rxlev_ul_ih (uplink) or RSS handover threshold u_rxlev_dl_ih (downlink), an internalhandover might be required if rxqual_ul/dl is also greater than l_rxqual_ul/dl_h.

These parameters specify N8 and P8 in the decision algorithm used in the BSS.N8 is the number of samples in the threshold comparison process. P8 is the number ofsamples in the processed measurement (process) relative to the (averaging) algorithm inplace.If at least P8 averages out of N8 averages are greater than RSS handover thresholdms_range_max, a handover might be required due to distance.

The decision_1_ncell_rxlev_av_h_calc parameter specifies which bin is used in thesurround_cell parameter for the purposes of candidate ordering. Therefore, it alsospecifies the hreqave value to use.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_p_bgt_rxlev_av_h parameter specifies which bin is used for therxlev_dl_ho and surround_cell parameters for the purposes of making a Better Cellpower budget (pbgt) handover decision.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

decision_1_tim_adv_av_alg

decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_h


decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_p


decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_p

The decision_1_tim_adv_av_alg parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to make handover decisions due todistance.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_h parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to make handover decisions due to uplinksignal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_ih parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to make handover decisions due to uplinksignal interference.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_p parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to generate power control changes due touplink signal strength.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

The decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_h parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to generate handover decisions due touplink signal quality.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid handover data.

The decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_p parameter specifies the bin number containing themeasurement averaging algorithm data used to generate power control changes due touplink receive quality.This parameter may not be changed to a bin which does not contain valid power controldata.

disuse_cnt_hreqave

dl_rxlev_ho_allowed

dl_rxqual_ho_allowed

egsm_handover_threshold

en_incom_ho

If the disuse_cnt_hreqave parameter is enabled, neighbour cells with a disuse countless than or equal to the maximum disuse count are still valid candidates for handovers.Disuse count is the number of consecutive measurement reports a previously reportedneighbour is not reported by the mobile station. If the neighbor is reported before themaximum disuse count is reached, the disuse count is reset to 0.If enabled, the maximum disuse count is defined by the surrounding cell hreqave.

The dl_rxlev_ho_allowed parameter enables or disables a handover due to downlinkreceive level (rxlev).

The dl_rxqual_ho_allowed parameter enables or disables a handover due to downlinkreceive quality (rxqual).

The egsm_handover_threshold parameter specifies the range of interference bandsallowed for handing over an extended GSM MS using a primary resource which isneeded by a primary MS. Allowed interference bands are those above or meeting aspecified threshold, which are considered best quality resources. Forced handovers maybe disallowed by disabling the egsm_handover_threshold parameter.

The en_incom_ho parameter enables or disables incoming handovers based onwhether or not the cell is barred.

erc_ta_priority

handover_power_level

handover_required_curr_ch

handover_required_reject_switch

handover_required_sp_ver_used

The erc_ta_priority parameter specifies the priority threshold for extended range cellneighbour. If the absolute timing advance is greater than the priority threshold, the ERCneighbours are placed at the top of the list of sorted handover candidates. Otherwise,the ERC neighbours are appended to the end of the list of candidates.

The handover_power_level parameter defines the power control level to be used by anMS during a handover to a different cell.

The handover_required_curr_ch parameter specifies whether or not the optionalmessage element current channel is included in the Handover Required message to theMSC.This parameter should conform to the MSC capabilities.This parameter can only be changed at the BSC.

The handover_required_reject_switch parameter disables or enables the delivery of ahandover required reject message from the MSC to the source BSS in the event that atarget cannot be found for a requested handover.This parameter only applies to the BSC (location = 0). If the handover_required_reject_switch is enabled (set to “1”), the BSS expects toreceive a “handover required reject” message from the switch. Any internal cellsthat are candidates for the handover will not be included in the “HandoverRequired” message. On receipt of the “Handover Required Reject” message theBSS will perform an internal handover if there are valid candidates. If the handover_required_reject_switch is disabled (set to “0”), the BSS will notexpect to receive a “Handover Required Reject” message from the switch and willinclude internal candidates in the “Ho Required” message.

The handover_required_sp_ver_used parameter determines whether the optionalelement speech_version_used can be built into the Handover Required message.

ho_exist_congest

ho_margin_def

ho_margin_type5

ho_margin_usage_flag

ho_only_max_pwr

The ho_exist_congest parameter specifies how to handle existing calls on a TCH whenan MS needs a TCH and none are available in that cell.The options are: (a) to attempt to handover as many calls as the number of queuedassignment requests, (b) to attempt to handover as many calls as meet the congestionhandover criteria, and (c) no handover attempts (for this condition).This parameter will be copied if the copy_cell command is used.

The ho_margin_def parameter sets the default value for the neighbour handover margin(ho_margin_cell) attribute of the source cell. The neighbour handover margin is set usingthe add_neighbor command and changed using the modify_neighbor command.The handover margin is the amount by which the neighbouring cell received signalstrength must exceed the source cell received signal to request a handover.In the context of the power budget process, the following equation must be true: IfPBGT(n) > ho_margin(n) then a handover may be required.

The ho_margin_type5 parameter sets the power budget type 5 handover margin.

The ho_margin_usage_flag parameter determines which sorting algorithm the systemuses to sort the neighbour list. If ho_margin_usage_flag is disabled, handover candidates are always sortedusing ho_margin_cell. If ho_margin_usage_flag is enabled:– Handover candidates for RXLEV handovers are sorted usingho_margin_rxlev [n].– Handover candidates for RXQUAL handovers are sorted usingho_margin_rxqual [n].– All other handover causes have neighbours are sorted usingho_margin_cell value.

The ho_only_max_pwr parameter specifies whether the MS or the BTS must be at fullpower before an rxlev or rxqual handover can take place.If this option is enabled: The MS must be at full power for an uplink handover. The BTS must be at full power for a downlink handover.If ho_only_max_pwr is enabled, the system also removes all candidates for interferencehandovers until the mobile/base is at full power.

ho_pwr_level_inner

hop_count

hop_qual_enabled

The ho_pwr_level_inner parameter specifies the handover power level for the innerzone of a Dual Band cell. The valid range for this parameter depends on the frequencyof the inner zone.

The hop_count parameter, combined with the hop_count_timer parameter, limits thenumber of intracell interference handovers for a call.The hop_count parameter sets the number of handovers. If the number of handoversdefined by the hop_count parameter occur within the time set by the hop_count_timer,the system escalates the handover to a RXQUAL handover to another cell.

The hop_qual_enabled parameter enables or disables the use of specific rxqualthresholds for hopping call handovers.Trials have shown that non-hopping calls can show poor quality of service when thereported rxqual value is around 5, whereas hopping calls can provide the same quality ofservice with the reported rxqual value at 6 or 7.If hop_qual_enabled is enabled and a hopping call is in progress, the system uses therxqual values set with the chg_cell_element command (see Syntax below).If hop_qual_enabled is disabled, the normal rxqual values set with the add_cellcommand are used.

hopping_support

hopping_systems_enabled

hopping_systems_hsn

The hopping_support parameter defines the frequency hopping in a cell. Two methodsof achieving frequency hopping are available.

The hopping_systems_enabled parameter enables or disables a frequency hoppingsystem.An index number (fhi) is required. The frequency hopping indicator (fhi) value specifieswhich hopping system is affected. The range of values, entered as <index> is 0 – 3.

The hopping_systems_hsn parameter specifies the hopping sequence (generator)number (HSN) to be used by the frequency hopping system. HSN is one of sevenparameters that defines a particular physical channel in a BTS.

hopping_systems_mobile_alloc

inter_cell_handover_allowed

interband_ho_allowed

interfer_ho_allowed

The hopping_systems_mobile_alloc parameter allocates the Absolute RadioFrequency Channel Number (ARFCN) frequencies for hopping (either baseband hoppingor synthesizer hopping).

The inter_cell_handover_allowed parameter specifies how internal and externalintercell handovers are managed at the BSC.Internal intercell handovers are defined as handovers between cells in the same BSS.External intercell handovers are defined as handovers between cells in different BSSs.

The interband_ho_allowed parameter specifies the handover frequencies for a cell.

The interfer_ho_allowed parameter disables or enables handovers due to interference.If this parameter is disabled, interference causes an intercell RXQUAL handover insteadof an intracell handover.

intra_cell_handover_allowed

l_rxlev_dl_h

l_rxlev_ul_h

l_rxqual_dl_h

l_rxqual_dl_h_data

This parameter disables or enables intracell handovers under two conditions: to begin thehandover or to begin the handover when co-channel interference is suspected. Intracellhandovers are defined as handovers within the same cell.BSS support is optional. If the BSS does not support an internal intracell handover, it isinitiated by sending a Handover Required message.

The l_rxlev_dl_h parameter specifies the handover thresholds for the lower Receive(Rx) level downlink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handover conditionexists.

The l_rxlev_ul_h parameter specifies the handover threshold for the lower Receive (Rx)level uplink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handover condition exists.

The l_rxqual_dl_h parameter specifies the handover control threshold for the lowerReceived (Rx) quality downlink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handovercondition exists.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_h_data parameter specifies the handover control threshold for thelower Received (Rx) quality downlink, for data transmissions only (for examplemodem-to-modem calls). This threshold is checked to determine if a handover conditionexists. This threshold is enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, byuse of the data_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In thissituation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_h threshold value, as set in the add_cellcommand.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

l_rxqual_dl_h_hopping

l_rxqual_ul_h

l_rxqual_ul_h_data

The l_rxqual_dl_h_hopping parameter specifies the handover control threshold for thelower Received (Rx) quality downlink, for hopping calls only. This threshold is checked todetermine if a handover condition exists. This threshold is enabled and set to be usedfor hopping calls, by use of the hop_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_elementcommand. In this situation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_h threshold value, asset in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_h parameter specifies the handover control threshold for the receive(Rx) quality uplink. This threshold is checked to determine if a handover condition exists.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_h_data parameter specifies the handover control threshold for thelower Received (Rx) quality uplink, for data transmissions only (for examplemodem-to-modem calls). This threshold is checked to determine if a handover conditionexists. This threshold is enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, byuse of the data_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In thissituation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_ul_h threshold value, as set in the add_cellcommand.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.


low_sig_thresh

mb_preference

missing_rpt

ms_distance_allowed


The low_sig_thresh parameter specifies the minimum receive level for redirectedhandovers. When a call, using a MultiBand MS, is on any cell, and a handover istriggered to a cell with a coincident cell, the handover takes place to the coincident cell, ifthe measured receive level from the target cell exceeds this parameter value.

The mb_preference parameter enables or disables the Multiband Intercell Handoverfeature.

The missing_rpt parameter enables or disables the suspension of the storing,averaging, and processing of downlink power control and handovers.

The ms_distance_allowed parameter disables or enables the distance comparisonprocess for handovers.When enabled, the distance comparison process might cause a handover if the distancebetween the MS and the BSS is greater than the ms_max_range. If this parameter isenabled, the value chosen for ms_max_range needs careful optimization.

msc_preference

number_of_preferred_cells

The msc_preference parameter specifies A interface messaging if an external handoveris needed during an assignment procedure. This parameter should align with the MSCimplementation which may depend on whether queueing is enabled in the cell. Thecause value sent to the MSC can be set according to whether directed retry is supportedby the MSC.

The number_of_preferred_cells parameter specifies the maximum number of targetcells to be included in a Handover Required message.The preferred list of target cells is a mandatory BSS field. The number of preferred cellsis given in order of predicted best performance.

override_intra_bss_pre_transfer

poor_initial_assignment

rel_tim_adv

rxlev_dl_ho

The override_intra_bss_pre_transfer parameter specifies whether or not a pre-transferrequest is sent to SM (Switch Manager) when the handover allocation message isreceived during an inter-cell handover.This parameter only applies to intra-BSS inter-cell handovers.Call processing sends the pre-transfer request to the switch manager, to make aconnection in the downlink direction from the active CIC to the new radio channel at thetime of the new radio channel assignment. This puts voice traffic on the new radiochannel that the mobile is being handed off to earlier than when the pre-transfer functionis disabled.This parameter also determines which method of audio connection is used for the BTSconcentration resource optimization for the handovers feature.

The poor_initial_assignment parameter enables or disables checking the timingadvance on a Random Access Channel (RACH). If the RACH is too far away, thisindicates that there has been a poor initial assignment, and therefore the RACH isdiscarded.If this feature is enabled, the ms_max_range parameter must be carefully optimized.

The rel_tim_adv parameter is the relative timing advance value used in HDPC averagingprocessing.The chg_act_alg_data rel_tim_adv command is used to modify the value of thisparameter.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rel_tim_adv command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxlev_dl_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the downlink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_ho command changes the averaging algorithm data forthe downlink receive level handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

rxlev_dl_zone

rxlev_ul_ho

rxlev_ul_zone

rxqual_dl_ho

rxqual_ul_ho

The rxlev_dl_zone parameter specifies the downlink receive level threshold that must becrossed for a handover to take place between the outer zone and the inner zone.

The rxlev_ul_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the uplink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_ho commands changes the averaging algorithm datafor the uplink receive level handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxlev_ul_zone parameter specifies the uplink receive level threshold that must becrossed for a handover to take place between the inner zone and the outer zone.

The rxqual_dl_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the downlink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_ho command changes the averaging algorithm datafor the downlink receive quality handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxqual_ul_ho parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making handoverdecisions with respect to the uplink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg_data rxqual_ul_ho command changes the averaging algorithm datafor the uplink receive quality handover.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_ul_ho command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

sdcch_ho

sdcch_timer_ho

u_rxlev_dl_ih

u_rxlev_ul_ih

ul_rxlev_ho_allowed

ul_rxqual_ho_allowed

worse_neighbor_ho

The sdcch_ho parameter enables or disables handovers on the SDCCH.When enabled, handovers are not allowed until at least (sdcch_timer_ho * 2)measurement report periods have elapsed.To allow handovers on the SDCCH with a minimum delay, the sdcch_ho parameter mustbe enabled and the sdcch_timer_ho parameter set to its minimum value of 1.

The sdcch_timer_ho parameter specifies the wait time (measured in SACCHmultiframes) before a handover on the SDCCH may occur.

The u_rxlev_dl_ih parameter specifies the intracell control thresholds for the Receive(Rx) level downlink. This parameter is evaluated in conjunction with the l_rxqual_dl_hto determine whether an intercell or intracell is being requested.

The u_rxlev_ul_ih parameter specifies the intra-cell control thresholds for the upperReceive (Rx) level uplink. This parameter is evaluated in conjunction with thel_rxqual_ul_h to determine whether an intercell or intracell is being requested.

The ul_rxlev_ho_allowed parameter enables or disables handovers due to uplinkreceive level (rxlev).

This parameter enables or disables handovers due to the uplink receive quality (rxqual).

The worse_neighbor_ho parameter specifies whether or not a call can be handed overto a neighbor cell due to the downlink receive level even when the neighbor cell receivelevel is lower than the serving cell receive level.

zone_ho_hyst

The zone_ho_hyst parameter specifies the margin for the inner zone handoverhysteresis. The system uses this value to determine whether an outer-zone toinner-zone handover should take place.A handover initiates when both the uplink and the downlink receive level averages aregreater than the sum of the respective uplink or downlink threshold defined for the innerzone plus the per cell hysteresis for interzone handover plus the difference between thecurrent uplink/downlink transmit power and the maximum uplink/downlink transmit powerof the inner zone carrier:RXLEV_DL > RXLEV_DL_ZONE + ZONE_HO_HYST + (BS_TXPWR –BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)or(RXLEV_UL > RXLEV_UL_ZONE + ZONE_HO_HYST + (MS_TXPWR –MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)).


0 or 1 0

0 to 2 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 to 65535 0

0 to 65535 0

0 to 255 0

0 to 255 0

0 Do not use hopping specific thresholds.1 Use hopping specific thresholds.

0 Disables adaptive power budget handovers atthe location.

1 Enables adaptive power budget handovers at thelocation using per cell cumulative area.

2 Enables adaptive power budget handovers at thelocation using per neighbor cumulative area.

0 Disables adaptive receive level handovers at thelocation.

1 Enables adaptive receive level handovers at thelocation.

0 Disables adaptive quality handovers at thelocation.

1 Enables adaptive quality handovers at thelocation.

0 to 255 0

0 to 65535 0

0 to 65535 0

0 to 255

40 (the value of 40 corresponds to a

hreqave of 8 and ahandover margin of 5)

1 (PGSM),2 (EGSM),

4 (DCS1800),8 (PCS1900)

1 (PGSM),2 (EGSM),

4 (DCS1800),8 (PCS1900)

The frequency type of the cell (as set by frequency_type).

0 to 6 0

0 to 127 0

The BSS places preferred band neighbours ahead ofnon-preferred band neighbours in order to attempt to

assigna channel from the preferred band for the MS.3 The BSS

attempts to assign a Multiband MS to thestrongest preferred-band neighbour that the MS reported

atthe time of SDCCH to TCH assignment, as well as attempt

to hand the MS over to the strongest preferred–bandneighbour that the MS reported when a handover is

required for normal radio resource reasons.This value combines the functions of values 1 and 2.

4 The BSS continually attempts to hand a Multiband MS over

to a preferred band TCH immediately after initialassignment.

The BSS will not attempt to allocate a TCH in the preferredband for this MS at the time of SDCCH-to-TCH

assignment.The BSS will enter a mode of continually monitoring for

qualified preferred-band neighbours reported by the MS inorder to hand the MS over. The BSS will stay in this modeuntil it finds a neighbour TCH in the preferred band for thecurrent serving cell. Handovers for normal radio resource

reasons may occur during the monitoring mode, and thesehandovers will be to the strongest preferred band

neighbourreported by the MS.

5 The BSS attempts to assign a Multiband MS to thestrongest preferred–band neighbour reported by the MS at

the time of SDCCH-to-TCH assignment.If this assignment is impossible, the BSS enters a mode of

continually monitoring for qualified preferred-bandneighbours reported by the MS in order to hand the MS

over. The BSS will stay in this mode until it finds aneighbour TCH in the preferred band. Handovers fornormal radio resource reasons may occur during themonitoring mode, and these handovers will be to the

The GSM Cell ID number NONEThe GSM Cell ID

number

NONE

–63 to 63 –63 to 63 0

–63 to 63 –63 to 63 NONE


1 Use coincident better cell detection2 Use coincident cell redirection and better

cell detection



0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

1 to 31 1 to 31 1

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 1

0 or 1 NONE

0

1

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 50 Forced handovers

are not allowed.1 Forced handovers

to interference band 1extended resource

are allowed.2 Forced handovers to interference bands

1 to 2extended resource







are allowed.









0 to 63 0 to 63 35

2

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM

0 to 15 for DCS1800 and

PCS1900


PCS1900

0 Not included1 Included

0 Disabled (reject message not required)1 Enabled (reject message required)

0 Disabled (no speech version)1 Enabled (build in speech version)

0 to 2 0

63 to +63 8

63 to +63 63

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 No handover attempts (for this condition)1 Attempt to handover as many calls as the

number of queued assignment requests2 Attempt to handover as many calls as meet the

congestion handover criteria

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

2

0 to 255 (0 disables intracell interference handovers) 255

0 or 1 0

2 to 19 for PGSM and EGSM


PCS1900


PCS1900

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 2 0

0 or 1 NONE

0 to 63 NONE

0 No hopping in this cell1 Synthesizer hopping2 Baseband hopping

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Cyclic hopping. The MA is hopped throughlowest to highest magnitudes, and then the cycle

repeats.1 to 63 Random hopping. HSN and MA are entries to

the algorithm table 6 of GSM

NONE

0 to 3 1

1 to 11

0 or 1 1

ARFCN depends on the frequency type for

thecell.

S If the cell is PGSM, the range is 1 through124.

S If the cell is EGSM, the range is either:- 1 through 124

- 975 through 1023 , 0.S If the cell is DCS1800, the range is 512

through 885.

0 Outgoing Inter-cell handover is not enabled. TheHandover Required message is sent to the MSC.

1 Outgoing Inter-cell handover is enabled.2 Outgoing internal intercell handover is disabled.The Handover Required message is not sent to

the MSC.3 Outgoing Inter-cell and external handovers aredisabled and the Handover Required message is

not sent to the MSC.

1 = PGSM2 = EGSM

3 = PGSM and EGSM4 = DCS1800

5 = PGSM and DCS18006 = EGSM and DCS1800

7 = PGSM, EGSM, and DCS18008 = PCS1900

9 = PGSM and PCS190010 = EGSM and PCS1900

11 = PGSM, EGSM, and PCS1900

If the Multiband Inter-cell Handover feature

is enabled:3 for PGSM and

EGSM cells4 for DCS1800 cells8 for PCS1900 cells

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 2 1

0 to 63 10

0 to 63 10

453 BER / 5 Qband

0 Intracell handovers are performed by the BSS.These calls are included as target cells in aHandover Required message to the MSC.

1 The BSS performs Intracell handovers. TheMSC is notified with a Handover Performed

message.2 Intracell handovers are disabled and the

Handover Required message is not sent to theMSC.

Represents -110 dBm to -47 dBm, as shown below:0 -110 dBm and lower

1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..


Represents -110 dBm to -47 dBm, as shown below:0 -110 dBm and lower

1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..








0 BER If dat_qual_enabled = 0

4QBand units If data_qual_enabled = 1




0 BER If dat_qual_enabled = 0

4QBand units If data_qual_enabled = 1









0 to 63 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0





0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 7 0

1 to 16 16

0 Directed Retry is supported within the BSS, but not across

the A-interface.1 Directed Retry is supported within the BSS. The only

A-interface impact is the Assignment Complete message,which contains the optional Cell ID if the Cell ID changes

during the assignment.2 The BSS sends the Handover Required message with

thecause directed retry to the MSC.� �

3 The BSS sends the Handover Required message with the

cause of the handover to the MSC (for example, BetterCell).

4 The BSS sends an Assignment Failure message with thecause directed retry and then sends a Handover� �

Required message with cause directed retry to the MSC.� �5 The BSS sends an Assignment Failure message with the

cause directed retry and then sends a Handover� �Required message with the cause of the handover to the

MSC (for example, Better Cell).6 The BSS sends a Handover Required message with

cause directed retry and then sends an Assignment� �Failure message with cause directed retry to the MSC.� �

7 The BSS sends a Handover Required message with thecause of the handover (for example, Better Cell) and then

sends an Assignment Failure message with causedirected retry to the MSC.� �

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

1 to 31

1 to 31

0 Send pre-transfer request to SM1 Do not send pre-transfer request to SM

0 Disabled1 Enabled



0 to 63 63

0 to 63 63


1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..


1 to 31

0 to 255

4 if alg_data=0 6 if alg_data=1 1 if

alg_data=2


1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..


1 to 31

0 to 255


alg_data=2

1 to 31

0 to 255


alg_data=2

0 or 1 NONE

1 to 31 1

0 to 63 45

0 to 63 45

0 or 1 1

0 or 1 1

0 or 1 0

0 Disabled1 Enabled


. ..


Represents -110 dBm to -47 dBm, as shown below:0 -110 dBm1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..

63 -47 dBm

Represents -110 dBm to -47 dBm, as shown below:0 -110 dBm1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..

63 -47 dBm

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Handover disabled1 Handover enabled

0

0 to 30

or -60 to 63

0 to 30 (Not Dual Band Cell))-60 to 63 (Dual Band Cell)

Dependencies

none NO

none YES

none NO

none NO

none NO

none NO

none NO

none NO


none NO

none NO

none NO

NO

YES

This parameter is invalid when ba_type

is ba_bcch.

The Multiband Inter-cell handover feature

must beenabled.

This parameter has no meaning if

band_preference_mode = 0 for this cell.

YES

YES

This parameter is unavailable if the

MultibandInter-cell handover feature is disabled.

After a RXQUAL handover, the system

applies thebounce_protect_marg

in value for the number of

SACCH periods set by the

bounce_protect_qual_tmr timer.

After a congestion handover, the system

applies thebounce_protect_marg

in value for the number of

SACCH periods set by the

bounce_protect_cong_tmr timer.

NO


unrestricted.If coincident_mb is set

to 1 or 2, both cells must be

SACCH neighbours of each other.

If coincident_mb is set to 2, both cells must

be atthe same site, the

cells must be neighbours of eachother, and the bsic

settings must be the same.

A cell cannot be coincident to itself.

NO

NO

YES


enabled.If coincident_mb is set

to 1 or 2, both cells must be

SACCH neighbours of each other.

If coincident_mb is set to 2, both cells must

be atthe same site, the

cells must be neighbours of eachother, and the bsic

settings must be the same.

If a coincident cell has not been selected, the

value ofcoincident_mb must

equal 0.A cell cannot be

coincident to itself.This parameter must

be disabled wheninner_zone_alg is set to indicate Dual Band

Cells.


enabled.

This parameter can only be modified if: either the Directed Retry or AlternateCongestion Relief

options are available,and

the neighbour is placed on the SACCH

list.

rxlev_dl_ho YES

rxlev_dl_ho YES

rxlev_dl_pc YES

rxqual_dl_ho YES

rxqual_dl_pc YES

YES

N1 must be greater than or equal to P1.

N1 must beless than or equal to the hreqt value set

usingchg_act_alg_data

command for rxlev_dl_pc and

rxlev_ul_pc.

YES

YES

YES

YES




command for rxlev_dl_pc and

rxlev_ul_pc.




command for rxqual_dl_pc and

rxqual_ul_pc.




command for rxqual_dl_pc and

rxqual_ul_pc.




command for rxlev_dl_ho and

rxlev_ul_ho.

YES

YES

YES

surround_cell YES

NONE YES




command for rxqual_dl_ho and

rxqual_ul_ho.




command for rxlev_dl_ho and

rxlev_ul_ho.


N8 must be less than or equal to the Hreqt

value setfor rel_tim_adv

rel_tim_adv YES

rxlev_ul_ho YES

rxlev_ul_ho YES

rxlev_ul_pc YES

rxqual_ul_ho YES

rxqual_ul_pc YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

YES

NONE YES

This parameter may only be changed on

EGSMsystems.

NONE YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

The maximum value for a PGSM or EGSM

system is19.

The maximum value for a DCS1800 system is 15.


This parameter applies only to the

BSC.

The handover_required_s

p_ver_used parameter

cannot be disabled (0) if the efr_enabled

parameteris enabled (1).

YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

YES

Congestion Relief feature is required.The MSC may need to increase the timer

waiting forthe Assignment

Complete message from the BSS

when this database parameter is enabled.

To use the ho_only_max_pwr

parameter, thedecision_alg_type

parameter must equal 1, to allow

the MS or BTS to reach full power.

YES

NONE YES

YES

This parameter may be modified only when the Dual

Band Cells feature is unrestricted.

alt_qual_procThis parameter is not valid at Horizonoffice

BTSsites.

YES

YES

YES

The hopping_support paPlace the system in

the SYSGEN ON mode before

using the chg_element or

chg_cell_elementcommands to change

this parameter.Using the

chg_hop_param command to change

thehopping system does not require SYSGEN ON.rameter defines

the frequency hopping in a cell.

The system must be in SYSGEN ON mode

tochange this

parameter with the chg_element or

chg_cell_element commands.Using the

chg_hop_params command to changethe hopping system

does not require SYSGEN ON.

Respond to the SITE reset prompt which

will bedisplayed after the

chg_element command is

entered to modify this parameter.

YES

NONE YES

YES

NONE YES

Refer to the descriptions for the chg_hop_params

command for restrictions on

changing the hoppingparameters.

The system does not check for errors when

changesare made in SYSGEN

ON mode. When SYSGEN is

turned off, however, the system does

check forerrors, and may reject

the command.

This parameter is not available unless the

MultibandInter-cell Handover feature is enabled.

This parameter must include, at a

minimum, thefrequency type for the cell. For example, if

the cellhas a frequency_type

of pgsm, then theinterband_ho_allowed

parameter must include

pgsm as a possible destination frequency

band forhandovers.

NONE YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

YES

YES

alt_qual_proc.See also

data_qual_enabled, hop_qual_enabled


YES

YES

YES


This parameter may not be changed for

Horizonofficesites.

alt_qual_procSee also

data_qual_enabled, hop_qual_enabled


YES

NONE YES

YES

NONE YES

ms_max_range YES


This parameter may not be changed for

Horizonofficesites.

This parameter is unavailable if the

MultibandInter-Cell Handover feature is restricted.This parameter may

not be disabled wheninner_zone_alg is set to indicate Dual Band

Cells forany cell in the BSS.

YES

NONE YES

The Directed Retry or the Multiband Intercell

Handover feature must be unrestricted.

YES

NONE YES

YES

YES

This parameter only applies to the BSC or

RXCDR.

When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can

not beset equal to

decision_1_tim_adv_av_alg.


not beset equal to one of the following parameters:decision_1_dl_rxlev_a

v_hdecision_1_dl_rxlev_a

v_ihdecision_1_p_bgt_rxl

ev_av_h

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

The Concentric Cells Option must be

enabled andthe inner_zone_alg

type must be set to 1.This parameter is not

available at Horizonoffice BTS

sites.


not beset equal to either:

decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_h, or


The Concentric Cells Option must be

enabled andthe inner_zone_alg parameter must be

set to 1.This parameter is not

available at Horizonoffice BTS

sites.


not beset equal to

decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_h.


YES

YES

YES

YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

NONE YES

External SDCCH handover must be

enabled at andsupported by the

MSC.The

hand_over_required_curr_ ch parameter

mustbe set to 1 so as to

include the information element inthe handover required message to the MSC.

The sdcch_ho parameter must be enabled. (This is

not monitored by the system.)

l_rxqual_dl_hThis parameter is

used by the BSS only when


l_rxqual_ul_hThis parameter is

used by the BSS only when


YES

The Concentric Cells feature must be

unrestricted.The range depends

on the value of inner_zone_alg:

S Dual Band Cell: -63 to 63.

S Not Dual Band Cell: 0 to 30.

This parameter is not available at

Horizonoffice BTSsites.


bts_p_con_ack

bts_p_con_interval

bts_power_control_allowed

bts_txpwr_max_inner

The bts_p_con_ack parameter specifies the maximum amount of time to wait for RFpower change acknowledgements to the BSS. This allows a repeat of the BTS powercontrol message if the BTS power has not been confirmed. This is effective only if thedecision_alg_num equals 1.

The bts_p_con_interval parameter specifies the minimum amount of time in multiples oftwo SACCH multiframes between successive RF power change orders to the BSS.The time period is greater than or equal to (nx – px + 1) hreqave / 2Where: x equals– 1 (lower threshold of RXLEV),– 2 (upper threshold of RXLEV),– 3 (lower threshold of RXQUAL), or– 4 (upper threshold of RXQUAL). n equals the values assigned for decision_1_ny where y is a value from 1 to 4. p equals the values assigned for decision_1_py where y is a value from 1 to 4. hreqave is the number of measurements from the MS that are used in calculatingone average.

The bts_power_control_allowed parameter enables or disables the downlink RF powercontrol for the BSS. When enabled, the BSS uses up to 15 power control levels.

The bts_txpwr_max_inner parameter specifies the maximum transmit power BTS innerzone for Dual Band cells.

decision_alg_type

dyn_step_adj

dyn_step_adj_fmpr

full_pwr_rfloss

l_rxlev_dl_p

l_rxlev_ul_p

The decision_alg_type parameter specifies the current power control algorithm.Disabling the decision_alg_type type parameter uses the bts_p_con_interval andms_p_con_interval parameters. This setting does not allow use of the bts_p_con_ackand ms_p_con_ack timers.Enabling decision_alg_type uses the bts_p_con_ack and ms_p_con_ack timers.Enabling the decision_alg_type parameter allows a power decision based on quality toincrease the power. This results in a rxlev above the upper rxlev thresholds set in:u_rxlev_dl_pcu_rxlev_ul_pc

The dyn_step_adj parameter enables or disables the uplink and downlink dynamic stepadjustment algorithm for the step size. When enabled, the calculation of step size caninclude or exclude dynamic power reduction caused by the level being above the upperlevel threshold.

The dyn_step_adj_fmpr parameter specifies the percentage power reduction used inthe dynamic power reduction calculation.

The full_pwr_rfloss parameter enables or disables the ability of the BSS power control tofully power up the MS and BTS at the point where the RF connection appears to be lost.When enabled, the transition to full power occurs when the threshold set bylink_about_to_fail is reached in the link_fail procedure.

The l_rxlev_dl_p parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signal strength ofthe serving cell. This threshold is checked to determine if BTS power should beincreased.

The l_rxlev_ul_p parameter specifies the lower uplink limit for the signal strength of themobile. This threshold is checked to determine if MS power should be increased.

l_rxqual_dl_p

l_rxqual_dl_p_data

l_rxqual_dl_p_hopping

The l_rxqual_dl_p parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signal quality ofthe serving cell. This threshold is checked to determine if BTS power should beincreased.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_p_data parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signalquality of the serving cell, for data transmissions only (for example modem-to-modemcalls). This threshold is checked to determine if BTS power should be increased. Thisthreshold is enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, by use of thedata_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In this situation it isused instead of the l_rxqual_dl_p threshold value, as set in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_dl_p_hopping parameter specifies the lower downlink limit for the signalquality of the serving cell, for hopping calls only. This threshold is checked to determineif BTS power should be increased. This threshold is enabled and set to be used forhopping calls, by use of the hop_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_elementcommand. In this situation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_p threshold value, asset in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.


l_rxqual_ul_p

l_rxqual_ul_p_data

l_rxqual_ul_p_hopping


The l_rxqual_ul_p parameter specifies the lower uplink limit of the signal quality of theMS. This threshold is checked to determine if MS power should be increased.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_p_data parameter specifies the lower uplink limit for the signal qualityof the serving cell, for data transmissions only (for example modem-to-modem calls).This threshold is checked to determine if MS power should be increased. This thresholdis enabled and set to be used when data is being transmitted, by use of thedata_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_element command. In this situation it isused instead of the l_rxqual_ul_p threshold value, as set in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

The l_rxqual_ul_p_hopping parameter specifies the lower uplink limit for the signalquality of the serving cell, for hopping calls only. This threshold is checked to determineif MS power should be increased. This threshold is enabled and set to be used forhopping calls, by use of the hop_qual_enabled parameter in a chg_cell_elementcommand. In this situation it is used instead of the l_rxqual_dl_p threshold value, asset in the add_cell command.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.

link_about_to_fail

ms_max_range

ms_p_con_ack

The link_about_to_fail parameter specifies the number of undecoded SACCH framesbefore the BSS and MS are increased to full power. The number of SACCH frames iscalculated by subtracting the number of undecoded SACCH frames represented by thevalue entered for this parameter from the number of undecoded SACCH framesrepresented by the link_fail parameter.For example, if link_fail is set to 5 (24 SACCH frames) and link_about_to_fail is set to1 (4 SACCH frames), the BSS and MS is increased to full power when 20 undecodedSACCH frames are received.Full power is specified by the max_tx_bts parameter for the downlink power; andmax_tx_ms or max power capability of the MS for uplink power.This provides a method for improving the quality of a call by increasing the power of thesignal transmitted by the BSS to an MS.

The ms_max_range parameter specifies the MS maximum range for the handoveralgorithm.This parameter must be programmed in terms of timing advance bits. The followingequation shows the relationship between distance and timing advance:(timing advance)(bit period)(propagation velocity) = 2 (distance from MS to BSS)Value 0 corresponds to no timing advance. Values 1 to 63 represent the bit periods thatthe MS transmission (to the BSS) are delayed.If The Extended Range Feature is unrestricted and Extended Range is enabled in thecell, the maximum value of ms_max_range increases to 219.

The ms_p_con_ack parameter specifies the time for which power control can beresumed if power change acknowledgement is not received from the MS. Thisparameter is effective only if the decision_alg_num equals 1.

ms_p_con_interval

ms_power_control_allowed

ms_power_offset

mspwr_alg

pbgt_mode

pow_inc_step_size_dl

pow_inc_step_size_ul

pow_red_step_size_dl

pow_red_step_size_ul

The ms_p_con_interval parameter specifies the minimum amount of time in multiples oftwo SACCH multiframes between successive RF power change orders to the MS.This value depends on the value for the decision_alg_num parameter. If decision_alg_num = 1, then the recommended value for ms_p_con_intervalequals hreqave divided by 2 (hreqave/2). If decision_alg_num = 0, then the minimum recommended value forms_p_con_interval equals 2 plus hreqave divided by 2 (2+hreqave/2).

The ms_power_control_allowed parameter enables or disables MS power control.Enabling this feature helps to reduce interference.

The ms_power_offset parameter specifies the power offset value sent out in the BCCHsystem information which will utilize the additional power capabilities of a class 3DCS1800 MS that is accessing on the RACH. The value is a positive power offset fromthe value set by ms_txpwr_max_cch.

The mspwr_alg parameter enables or disables the enhanced power control algorithm.The enhanced power control algorithm is used to prevent oscillation for MS power controlwhere power is reduced for RXQUAL reasons and subsequently increased for RXLEVreasons.

The pow_inc_step_size_dl parameter specifies the step sizes for power increases fromthe BTS to the MS.

The pow_inc_step_size_ul parameter specifies the step size increases from the MS tothe BTS.

The pow_red_step_size_dl parameter specifies the step size for power decreases fromthe BTS to the MS.

The pow_red_step_size_ul parameter specifies the step size for power decreases fromthe MS to the BTS.

pwr_handover_allowed

rapid_pwr_down

rpd_offset

rpd_period

rpd_trigger

The pwr_handover_allowed parameter enables or disables the power budgetassessment for handovers.When enabled, a handover to cell “n” might be required if: PBGT(n) – ho_margin(n) > 0.This comparison ensures that the MS is always linked to the cell with the minimum pathloss even though the quality and level thresholds may not have been exceeded.

This parameter enables or disables the rapid power down procedure. The rapid powerdown procedure bypasses the pow_red_step_size values set in the database in aneffort to bring the power of the MS to an acceptable level quickly.Detected MS power levels are averaged over the number of SACCH periods specified bythe rpd_period parameter. This average is compared to the value specified for therpd_trigger value. The rapid power down procedure will be initiated when the calculatedvalue is greater than the value specified for the rpd_trigger parameter.

The rpd_offset parameter specifies the offset value used when calculating the receiveuplink level for an MS when the rapid power down procedure initiates.The receive uplink level is equal to rpd_trigger minus rpd_offset.

The rpd_period parameter specifies the number of SACCH frames used to calculate arolling average of uplink rxlev values.Detected MS power levels are averaged over the number of SACCH periods specified bythe rpd_period parameter. This average is compared to the value specified for therpd_trigger value. The rapid power down procedure initiates when the calculated valueis greater than the value specified for the rpd_trigger parameter.

The rpd_trigger parameter specifies the threshold used to initiate the rapid power downprocedure.Detected MS power levels are averaged over the number of SACCH periods specified bythe rpd_period parameter. This average is compared to the value specified for therpd_trigger value. The rapid power down procedure initiates when the calculated valueis greater than the value specified for the rpd_trigger parameter.The receive uplink power level is equal to rpd_trigger minus rpd_offset.

rxlev_dl_pc

rxlev_ul_pc

rxqual_dl_pc

rxqual_ul_pc

tx_power_cap

The rxlev_dl_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making power controldecisions with respect to the downlink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_pc command changes the averaging algorithm data forthe downlink receive level power control.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxlev_ul_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making power controldecisions with respect to the uplink receive signal level.The chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_pc command changes the averaging algorithm data forthe uplink receive level.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxlev_ul_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxqual_dl_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making powercontrol decisions with respect to the downlink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_pc command changes the averaging algorithm datafor the downlink receive quality power control.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_dl_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The rxqual_ul_pc parameter specifies the averaging parameters for making powercontrol decisions with respect to the uplink receive signal quality.The chg_act_alg rxqual_ul_pc command changes the averaging algorithm data for theuplink receive quality power control.A bin_num is used in the chg_act_alg_data rxqual_ul_pc command to specify thelocation of the parameters to be modified.

The tx_power_cap parameter specifies all cells within a site to be either low transmittingpower capable or high transmitting power capable. This parameter is valid only at DCS1800 or PCS1900 sites. This parameter is not valid for micro sites. This parameter can be set when the primary outer zone frequency type f the cell isPGSM, EGSM, DCS1800, or PCS1900 provided that the cell is a Dual Band Cell.If the cell is not, the frequency must be DCS1800 or PCS1900 to changetx_power_cap.

u_rxlev_dl_p

u_rxlev_ul_p

u_rxqual_dl_p

u_rxqual_ul_p

use_derived_ho_power

The u_rxlev_dl_p parameter specifies the signal strength for the upper downlink limit ofthe serving cell.BTS transmit power may be reduced if the MS signal strength is greater than this value.

This parameter specifies the signal strength for the upper uplink limit of the serving cell.Mobile transmit power may be reduced if the MS transmit signal strength is greater thanthis value.

The u_rxqual_dl_p parameter specifies the power control threshold for the best alloweddownlink receive quality (rxqual). The valid range and default values for this parameterare dependent on the type of unit that is selected.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.An Rxqual value better (lower BER rate) than what is specified by the u_rxqual_ul_pparameter may result the reduction of downlink power.

The u_rxqual_ul_p parameter sets the power control threshold for the best alloweduplink receive quality (rxqual). The valid range and default values for this parameter aredependent on the type of unit that is selected.Receive quality processing is measured using Bit Error Rate (BER) values or QualityBand (QBand) units. The type of unit is specified by the alt_qual_proc parameter.An Rxqual value better (lower BER rate) than what is specified by the u_rxqual_ul_pparameter may result the reduction of MS power.

The use_derived_ho_power parameter specifies how the system manages the derivedhandover power level for internal intercell handovers.When disabled, these handovers use the power level in the database.When enabled, these handovers use a power level derived from the rxlev reported by theMS for the target cell.

Valid range Value description

0 to 31

0 to 31

0 or 1


012...


.

.


012...


.

.


0 BTS power control disabled1 BTS power control enabled


0 to 31

0 to 2

0 to 10 0 to 10

0 or 1

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 Power control algorithm number 11 Power control algorithm number 2 (enables the

use of p_con_ack timers)

0 Disabled1 Enabled (excludes power reduction)2 Enabled (includes power reduction)


Represents -110 dBm to -47 dBm, as shown below:

0 -110 dBm and lower1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..



0 -110 dBm and lower1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..


0 to 1810 BER Ifalt_qual_proc = 00 to 7 QBand If alt_qual_proc = 1












0 to 15

0 to 31

Represents the number of SACCH frames as shown below:

0 0 SACCH frames1 4 SACCH frames2 8 SACCH frames

. ..

15 60 SACCH frames

0 to 63

0 to 219

0 to 63 for normal cells0 to 219 for Extended Range cells


.

.


0 to 31

0 or 1

0 to 3

0 or 1

0 or 1

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14

2, 4

2, 4


.

.


0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 0 dB1 2 dB2 4 dB3 6 dB

0 Disabled1 Enabled

1 MS uses servicing channel measurements tocalculte power budget.

0 MS uses reported servicing cell BCCH signalstrength to calculate power budget.

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 to 63

1 to 32

0 to 63

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

Each step represents an increase of 1dBm, from -110 dBm to

-47 dBm, as shown in the table below:0 -110 dBm and lower

1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

.

.

.63 -47 dBm and higher

1 to 31

0 or 1

1 to 31

0 to 255

1 to 31

0 to 255

1 to 31

0 to 255

0 Low power1 High power

0 to 63

0 to 63

0 or 1


0 -110 dBm1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..

63 -47 dBm


0 -110 dBm1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..

63 -47 dBm

0 to 1810 BER If alt_qual_proc = 00 to 7 QBand If

alt_qual_proc = 1

0 to 1810 BER (1 step = 0.01% bit



0 to 1810 BER If alt_qual_proc = 00 to 7 QBand If

alt_qual_proc = 1

0 to 1810 BER (1 step = 0.01% bit



0 Disabled1 Enabled


1 (equals 2 SACCH multiframes) decision_alg_num = 1 YES

2 (equals 4 SACCH multiframes) YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES


This parameter will not work if the specified location

is the BSC (location = 0).hreqave

bts_p_con_ackdecision_1_n1 through decision_1_n4decision_1_p1 through decision_1_p4

This parameter may be modified only when the Dual

Band Cells feature is unrestricted.

0 NONE YES

0 NONE YES

10 NONE NO

0 NONE YES

30 Must be less than u_rxlev_dl_p YES

30 Must be less than u_rxlev_ul_p YES

YES

YES

YES


alt_qual_procMust be greater than u_rxqual_dl_p


0 BER If data_qual_enabled = 04 QBand units If data_qual_enabled

= 1


0 BER If data_qual_enabled = 04 QBand units If data_qual_enabled

= 1


This parameter may not be changed for Horizonoffice

sites.

YES

YES

YES

YES




sites.


alt_qual_procMust be greater than u_rxqual_ul_p







sites.

2 YES

63 YES

2 decision_alg_num = 1 YES

link_about_to_fail must be less than link_fail

max_tx_bts

The range for the ms_max_range parameter

depends on whether the Extended Range feature is

enabled or disabled.This parameter is not available at

Horizonoffice sites.

2 hreqave YES

1 NONE YES

0 YES

0 NONE YES

0 YES

2 YES

2 YES

2 YES

2 YES

If the cell is not a type 3 MS cell, 0 is the only valueallowed.

The Dual Band Cells feature must be unrestricted.

Changing this parameter to 1 adds this cell to its won

neighbour list. This auto-created neighbour will not

be deleted by the user. It can only be deleted by

changing this element back to 0.

This parameter must be greater than or equal to

pow_red_step_size_dl.

This parameter must be greater than or equal to

pow_red_step_size_ul.

This parameter must be less than or equal to

pow_inc_step_size_dl.

This paremeter must be less than or equal to

pow_inc_step_size_ul.

1 NONE YES

0 NONE YES

8 YES

2 NONE YES

45 (- 65 dBm) YES

This parameter must be less than rpd_trigger.


This parameter must be greater than l_rxlev_ul_p.

This parameter must be greater than rpd_offset.


4 if alg_data=0 1 if alg_data=1 YES

YES

YES

decision_1_ul_rxqual_av_p YES

0 YES

When alg_num is set to 255, bin_num can not be

set equal to decision_1_dl_rxlev_av_p.

4 if alg_data=0 1 if alg_data=1 1 if alg_data=2


set equal to decision_1_ul_rxlev_av_p.



set equal to decision_1_dl_rxqual_av_p.


This parameter is valid only if the transceivers at thesite are inactive.

The system does not accept this parameter if the

associated DRIs are unlocked.

40 NONE YES

40 NONE YES

YES

YES

0 YES


alt_qual_procSince better rxqual corresponds to a

lower bit errorrate, u_rxqual_dl_p should be less than

l_rxqual_dl_p.


alt_qual_procSince better rxqual corresponds to a

lower bit errorrate, u_rxqual_ul_p must be less than

l_rxqual_ul_p.

This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice sites.

DATABASE PARAMETER Description Valid range

alt_qual_proc 0 or 1

data_qual_enabled 0 or 1

intave 1 to 31

interfer_bands 0 to 63

n_avg_i 1 to 15

rpt_bad_qual_no_mr 0 to 2

The alt_qual_proc parameter specifies whether receive quality processing is performedusing Bit Error Rate (BER) values or Quality Band (QBand) units. The type of valuesand the range of values of six parameters are determined by the value assigned to thealt_qual_proc parameter.

The data_qual_enabled parameter enables or disables the use of specific rxqualthresholds for data call handovers.A data call is one that involves the transmission of computer data, such as amodem–to–modem call. These types of calls are very sensitive to bit errors. Therefore,specific rxqual thresholds may be configured to trigger data call handovers.

The intave parameter specifies the algorithm data needed for performing interferenceband averaging and classification during idle channel interference processing.

whose limit 0 to X5 is adjusted by Operations and Maintenance (O & M).

The n_avg_i parameter specifies the number of signal strength measurements that mustbe made for each filtered interference signal strength sample. NAVG_I is the number ofradio blocks that the signal strength is computed on over a period of TAVG_I.

The rpt_bad_qual_no_mr parameter specifies whether or not the uplink quality value of7 is allowed in a missing measurement report.When rpt_bad_qual_no_mr is set to 0, the worst quality value, 7, is not used to signifythe quality if the measurement report does not arrive.When rpt_bad_qual_no_mr is set to 1, the worst quality value, 7, is used to signify thequality if the measurement report does not arrive.The OMC-R is able to display and change rpt_bad_qual_no_mr over the BSS–OMC-Rinterface. This attribute is not required during cell creation.

Value description Default value Dependencies

0

0 alt_qual_proc

8 NONE

63

2 The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.

0 NONE

0 BER Units1 Quality band units

The value that is entered for the alt_qual_procparameter determines the type of values, the rangeof values, and the default values for the dependent

parameters.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

1 2 SACCH multiframes2 4 SACCH multiframes

.

.



0 -110 dBm1 -109 dBm2 -108 dBm

. ..

63 -47 dBm





YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES



bs_pa_mfrms 0 to 7

extended_paging_active

The bs_pa_mfrms parameter specifies the number of multiframes betweentransmissions of paging messages to MSs of the same paging group. The number ofpaging blocks available (per CCCH) are those available (on a specific CCCH) multipliedby (bs_pa_mfrms).

The extended_paging_active parameter enables or disables extended paging.When enabled, the BTS sends pages to an MS in its extended page group when allpages could not be transmitted in the designated page group for the MS. The MS mustreceive and analyze messages for its paging group and the group two paging blockslater.When disabled, extended page is not allowed.



0 YES

0 NONE YES


Represents the multiframes period for the transmission of

PAGING REQUEST messages to the same paging group.

Value bs_pa_mfrms0 2 multiframes1 3 multiframes2 4 multiframes3 5 multiframes4 6 multiframes5 7 multiframes6 8 multiframes7 9 multiframes

The value chosen for this field will be dependant

upon the size of the location area and the ratio of

mobile originated to mobile terminated calls.



prioritize_microcell 0 or 1

The prioritize_microcell parameter specifies whether or not the level (micro or macro)of the serving cell impacts the sorting of the candidate list.If prioritize_microcell is set to 0, the level of the service cell does not impact sorting ofthe candidate list.if prioritize_microcell is set to 1, the level of the serving cell impacts the sorting of thecandidate list.


1 YES


0 No impact on sorting1 Impact on sorting

The Microcell feature must be unrestricted to use this

parameter.


congest_at_source

congest_at_target

tch_busy_critical_threshold

tch_busy_norm_threshold

tch_congest_prevent_thres

tch_flow_control

The congest_at_source parameter specifies how a specified source cell treats targetcells when trying to find candidates for an imperative handover.The specified source cell may be enabled to: (a) treat all target cells equally or (b)immediately retry target cells which were in the process of congestion relief.

The congest_at_target parameter specifies how a specified cell behaves if it rejects ahandover request.

The tch_busy_critical_threshold parameter specifies the threshold for initiating theflow control procedure barring two of the access classes 0 to 9 from making calls due toTCH congestion. The two classes that are barred are selected randomly. The flowcontrol procedure initiates when the percentage of busy TCHs is equal to or greater thanthe value entered for this parameter.This parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The tch_busy_norm_threshold parameter specifies the threshold for initiating the flowcontrol procedure to bar a single access class 0 through 9 from making a call due to TCHcongestion. The class that is barred is selected randomly. The flow control procedureinitiates when the percentage of busy TCHs is equal to or greater than the value enteredfor this parameter.This parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The tch_congest_prevent_thres parameter specifies the level of overall TCH utilizationby any MS in a given Cell, at which the Congestion Relief procedure is initiated.This parameter is expressed as a percentage.

The tch_flow_control parameter enable or disables the TCH flow control option.The flow control procedure tries to reduce the load on the system when the TCH usagegoes above thresholds determined by the tch_busy_norm_threshold andtch_busy_critical_threshold parameters. The reduction in traffic is achieved by barringaccess classes and manipulating the tx_integer and max_retran parameters.


81 to 100

0 to 100

0 or 1

0 The source cell treats all target cells equally as candidates

for imperative handovers.1 The source cell immediately retries target

cells which werein the process of congestion relief.

0 or 10 The source cell treats all target

cells equally as candidatesfor imperative handovers.

1 The source cell immediately retries target cells which were

in the process of congestion relief.

0 The system takes no action if the Cell rejects a

handover request.1 The system invokes Congestion Reliefprocedures if this Cell rejects a handover

request.

0 or 10 The system takes no action if the

Cell rejects ahandover request.

1 The system invokes Congestion Relief

procedures if this Cell rejects a handoverrequest.


to allocate).


to allocate).

0 Disabled1 Enabled


0 YES

0 YES

100 NO

100 NO

YES

0 NONE YES


The parameter can be set only if the Congestion

Relief feature is unrestricted.

The parameter can be set only if the Congestion

Relief feature is unrestricted.

Must be greater than or equal to

tch_busy_norm_threshold.

Must be less than or equal totch_busy_critical_threshold.

100 (The value 100 indicates an attempt to use the lastresource).


This parameter must be greater than or equal tomb_tch_congest_thres.


direct_inner_zone_threshold

dual_band_offset

inner_zone_alg

The direct_inner_zone_threshold parameter specifies the rxlev threshold that must beexceeded by the MS reported rxlev for the call to qualify for accelerated allocation of aninner zone resource.

The dual_band_offset parameter estimates the effects of the power level differencesthat occur when comparing signal strengths from different zones. Thedual_band_offset is applied to power budget handover calculations from the inner zoneto cells of any frequency type. Plus, it is used to evaluate the criteria for the interzonehandovers within a cell.

The inner_zone_alg parameter specifies the use algorithm and the associatedparameters for the inner zone of the cell.

ms_txpwr_max_inner

outer_zone_usage_level

secondary_freq_type

The ms_txpwr_max_inner parameter specifies the maximum power an MS can use inthe inner zone of a concentric cell.

The outer_zone_usage_level parameter specifies the percentage level of outer celltraffic channel (TCH) usage. If this parameter is set to 0, channels in the inner zone is used whenever an MS isqualified to use those resources. If this parameter is set to any other value, the inner zone resources are allocatedonly when an MS is qualified and at least the specified percentage of outer zoneTCHs is in use.

The secondary_freq_type parameter specifies the frequency type of the inner zoneband of a Dual Band cell.


0 to 63 0 to 63

-63 to 63 -63 to 63

0 to 3

0 = disable inner zone1 = power based use algorithm

The system displays prompts for:S ms_txpwr_max_inner

Valid range:- PGSM and EGSM:

5 to 39 dBm (odd values only; value must be less thanor equal to max_tx_ms)

Default value: max_tx ms- DCS1800 and PCS1900:

0 to 30 dBm (even values only; value must be less than

or equal to max_tx_ms)Default value: max_tx ms

S zone_ho_hyst,Valid range: 0 to 30

Default value:0S rxlev_dl_zone

Valid range: 0 to 63Default value: 63S rxlev_ul_zone

Valid range: 0 to 63Default value: 63

2 = interference based use algorithmThe system prompts for:S neighbor_report_timer

Valid range: 0 to 255 SACCH periodsDefault value: 10

3 = The Dual Band Cell Use Algorithm is used. The prompts shown

in Table 5-3 are generated and displayed.

0 to 100

1,2,4,8


and 33


and 33

1 PGSM2 EGSM

4 DCS18008 PCS 1900


63 YES

0 YES

0 YES


The Concentric Cells option must be enabled in orderto set this parameter.



The Concentric Cells feature must be unrestricted tochange inner_zone_alg.


Cannot set this parameter to Dual Band cells forPCS1900 cells.

Before this parameter can be set to Dual Band (3)the following dependencies must be met:

The Dual Band Cells feature must be unrestricted inorder to set inner_zone_alg to 3.

The Coincident Multiband feature and the Dual BandCells feature must not be set at the same time, so

coincident_mb must be 0.RTFs must not be equipped for the inner zone.

The Multiband Inter-Cell Handover feature must beenabled to change inner_zone_alg to 3

(mb_preference parameter must not be 0).

YES

0 YES

NO

Same value as max_tx_ms

ms_txpwr_max_inner must be less than or equal tomax_tx_ms if the value for inner_zone_alg equals 1

(Dual Band cell).This parameter is not available at Horizonoffice BTS

sites.

The Concentric Cells feature must be enabled.This parameter can not be modified at a

Horizonoffice site.

This parameter is set to the primary frequency typewhen a cell is not configured as a Dual Band cell.

This parameter may be modified only when changinginner_zone_alg to 3 with the chg_cell_element

command.At Dual Band cells:

S When the Cell frequency type is set to PGSMor EGSM, the secondary_freq_type can only

be set to DCS1800.S When the Cell frequency type is set to

DCS1800, the secondary_freq_type can onlybe set to PGSM or EGSM.

At non-Dual Band cells, the secondary_freq_type isset to the primary frequency type.


cbc_fast_select 0 or 1

cbc_intface_vers 0 or 1

cbc_vbind_cntr 0 to 255

cbch_enabled 0 or 1

cbs_outage_cntr 0 to 255

Valid range

The cbc_fast_select parameter enables and disables the fast connect function for theBSC. The fast connect function supports X.25 networks that do not support user data inconnect and disconnect requests.

The cbc_intface_vers parameter selects the interface for each BSC site.The available interfaces are either the standard interface or the interface with therepetition rate interpretation and CBCH loading fields.

The cbc_vbind_cntr parameter sets the number of successful VBINDs sent by the BSSto the CBC before a negotiate must take place within the next VBIND sent.This parameter is effective on a per BSC basis.

The cbch_enabled parameter enables the Cell Broadcast Channel (CBCH) option in acell.The CBCH is used with the Short Message Service (SMS) Cell Broadcast feature. Anoperator defined message or set of background messages may be transmitted on theCBCH when the cbch_enabled parameter is enabled.

The cbs_outage_cntr parameter introduces a delay between an outage occurring andthe CBS halting transmission of CBC originated messages.This parameter is effective on a per BTS site basis.

Value description Dependencies

1 YES

0 YES

0 to 255 0 YES

NONE YES

0 to 255 0 YES

Default value


0 Disabled1 Enabled

This parameter is valid only for the BSC.

0 Standard interface1 Interface with the repetition

rate interpretationand CBCH loading fields

This parameter is only valid for the BSC.

This parameter is only valid for the BSC.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

Enabling of CBCH is not permitted if no AGCH is

reserved in a non-combined cell (bs-ag-

blks-res = 0and ccch-conf other than

1).

This parameter is only valid for a BTS site.


bts_type 0 or 1

carrier_disable_time

carriers_ins_pwr_fail 0 to 30 0 to 30

Valid range

Value description

The bts_type parameter specifies the BTS configuration type. It is valid only for sites 1to 100.

0 BTP1 BTP and DHP

The carrier_disable_time parameter specifies the time delay between putting individualcarriers into battery conservation mode after a main power failure is reported.For example, when a main power failure is first reported the system waits for the periodof time specified by the carrier_disable_time parameter before placing the first carrierinto battery conservation mode. Then the system waits for the same period of timebefore placing the next carrier into battery conservation mode.

120 to 65535

The carriers_ins_pwr_fail parameter specifies the number of carriers (RCUs) left up inthe maintenance power state when emergency battery power starts (that is, during amain power failure).

Dependencies

NONE NO

NONE NO

30 NO

Default value


This parameter may not be changed to 0 if DHPsexist at the site, or if max_dris is set to 0.This parameter may not be changed at

Horizonofficesites. It is automatically set to 1 when a

Horizonoffice cabinet is equipped.This parameter must be set to 0 for M-Cell2, M-

Cell6,M-Cellcity, M-Cellarena, M-Cellarenamacro and

Horizonmacro cabinets.




auto_rf_loss_trace 0 to 2

call_trace_options 0 to 100, and 255

ct_flow_control_hi_level 20 to 100

ct_flow_control_lo_level 0 to 80

ct_flow_control_msc_trace 0 or 1

trace_msgs_after_ho 0 to 8

The auto_rf_loss_trace parameter enables and disables automatic RF Loss tracing fora cell. The destination for RF loss measurement reports is also specified when RF losstracing is enabled.If the auto_rf_loss_trace parameter is enabled for a cell with the destination set for theMMI and an RF loss occurs in the cell, a measurement report is sent to the MMI and isdisplayed in the same format as the output for the trace_call command. An RLM causefor the RF loss is included in the additional trace status field when the measurementreport when generated by the RF loss trace.

The call_trace_options parameter enables or disables MSC initiated traces. It alsospecifies the percentage of traces exclusively reserved for MSC initiated call traces.The number of call trace instances that may be created is affected by the percentage oftraces reserved exclusively for MSC initiated traces. This percentage is specified usingthe call_trace_options element. For example, if 50% of the traces are reserved forinitiation from the MSC, a maximum of eight instances may be created using thetrace_call command.

The ct_flow_control_hi_level parameter specifies the percentage of call trace OMLbuffer space that may be used before flow control is enabled. When this limit is reached,the BSS parameter ct_flow_control_bss_enabled is set to 1. (This level is not used todisable flow control.)Setting this parameter to 100 disables flow control.

The ct_flow_control_lo_level parameter specifies the percentage of call trace OMLbuffer space that may be used before flow control is enabled. When this limit is reached,the BSS parameter ct_flow_control_bss_enabled is set to 0. (This level is not used todisable flow control.)

The ct_flow_control_msc_trace parameter specifies whether or not MSC traces areallowed when flow control is enabled.

The trace_msgs_after_ho parameter specifies the number of messages that the systemcollects immediately after a handover occurs.

trace_msgs_before_ho 0 to 8The trace_msgs_before_ho parameter specifies the number of messages that thesystem collects immediately before a handover occurs.

Value description Default value

0

0

20 to 100 60

0 to 80 20

0

5

0 Automatic RF loss tracing disabled forthis cell

1 Automatic RF loss tracing enabled forthis cell; send measurement reports to

MMI and OMC2 Automatic RF loss tracing enabled forthis cell; send measurement reports to

OMC-R only

0 to 100 The percentage of traces reserved forMSC initiated traces on a per LCF basis.255 MSC invoked call traces disabled.

0 MSC traces are allowed while flow is restricted.1 MSC traces are not allowed while flow is

restricted.

Dependencies

NONE NO

NONE NO

NO

NO

NONE NO

YES


ct_flow_control_hi_level must be greater thanct_flow_control_lo_level plus 20.

ct_flow_control_lo_level must be less thanct_flow_control_hi_level minus 20.

This parameter is used only when handover records

are requested and RSS, Abis and/or MS Powercontrol data are specified.


YES

This parameter is used only when handover records

are requested and RSS, Abis and/or MS Powercontrol data are specified.



allow_32k_trau

bssgp_block_retries

bssgp_flow_control

bssgp_racap_retries

bssgp_reset_retries

bssgp_scheduling

bssgp_unblock_retries

gprs_bs_cv_max

gprs_dl_pwr_mode

gprs_drx_timer_max

The allow_32k_trau parameter enables or disables 32 kbps GPRS TRAU timeslots on acarrier. When this parameter is enabled for an RTF, all GPRS TRAU channels are 32bkps channels. Both CS-3 and CS-4 are supported.Both BSC-PCU GDS and BSC-BTS may be equipped. The BSS calculates bandwidthrequirements during the equipage of the timeslots.

The bssgp_block_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for cell block messages to the SGSN.

The bssgp_flow_control parameter specifies the downlink flow control mechanism forthe PCU.

The bssgp_racap_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for RA-Capability-Update messages to the SGSN.

The bssgp_reset_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for Reset messages to the SGSN.

The bssgp_scheduling parameter specifies the scheduling type used in downlink flowcontrol at the PCU. Packets can be scheduled on either a First In/First Out or an EarliestDeadline First basis.

The bssgp_unblock_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated by theBSS for cell Unblock messages to the SGSN.

The gprs_bs_cv_max specifies the maximum count down value a mobile can use foruplink RLC data transfer. The MS sends a count down value in each uplink RLC datablock starting gprs_bs_cv_max blocks from the last block. The value sent isdecremented by one in each subsequent block. This allows the network to identify thelast RLC block in the uplink TBF.

The gprs_dl_pwr_mode parameter specifies the downlink power control mode that thePCU uses to broadcast data blocks to the MS.

The gprs_drx_timer_max parameter specifies the maximum timer value allowed for theMS to request for non–DRX mode after packet transfer mode.

gprs_enabled

gprs_intraho_allwd

gprs_mac_mode

The gprs_enabled parameter specifies whether or not GPRS is unrestricted at a cell.The gprs_supported broadcast parameter describes the GPRS configuration of a cell.The BSS implements this as two cell elements: gprs_enabled and pcch_alloc.

The gprs_intraho_allwd parameter specifies whether or not the BSS performs intra-cellhandovers to free GPRS timeslots currently in use for circuit traffic. Such handoversrecover PDTCHs which have been switched to TCHs.

The gprs_mac_mode parameter specifies the medium access mode to be used by thePCU. The mode can be either “fixed” or “dynamic”.

gprs_ms_pan_dec

gprs_ms_pan_inc

gprs_ms_pan_max

gprs_ms_txpwr_max_cch

gprs_network_operation_mode

The gprs_ms_pan_dec parameter specifies the amount by which to decrement the MScounter n3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks receivedby the MS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented bygprs_ms_pan_inc. n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the presetinternal timer T3182 expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182defines how long the mobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero,then the MS performs an abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSMstandard referred to in this description.

Th gprs_ms_pan_inc parameter specifies the amount by which to increment the MScounter n3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks receivedby the MS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented bygprs_ms_pan_inc. n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the presetinternal timer T3182 expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182defines how long the mobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero,then the MS performs an abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSMstandard referred to in this description.

The gprs_ms_pan_max parameter specifies the maximum value of the MS countern3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks received by theMS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented by gprs_ms_pan_inc.n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the preset internal timer T3182expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182 defines how long themobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero, then the MS performsan abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSM standard referred to in thisdescription.

The gprs_ms_txpwr_max_cch parameter specifies the maximum transmit powerallowed for GPRS MSs.

The gprs_network_operation_mode parameter specifies whether a GPRS is presentbetween the MSC and the SGSN.

gprs_pb

gprs_pc_alpha

gprs_pc_meas_chan

gprs_reconfig_thresh_idle_tch

gprs_sig_bvci

max_ms_dl_buffer

max_ms_dl_rate

ns_alive_retries

ns_block_retries

ns_unblock_retries

nsei

num_gbl_dl_thrput_samples

num_gbl_ul_thrput_samples

The gprs_pb parameter specifies the power reduction used by the BTS on the BCCHblocks.

The gprs_pc_alpha is the system parameter broadcast on the BCCH. It is used as amultiplier of the power offset in power control calculations. The actual multiplying factoris one tenth of the value set in this parameter; that is, if N is the value of this parameter,the multiplying factor is N/10.

The gprs_pc_meas_chan parameter specifies whether the MS measures the receivedpower level on the downlink BCCH or PDCH in order to control the uplink power.

The gprs_reconfig_thresh_idle_tch parameter specifies the number of idle circuitswitched resources on the GPRS carrier that must be exceeded before a switchabletimeslot is reconfigured as a Packet Data Traffic Channel (PDTCH).

The gprs_sig_bvci parameter specifies the BVCI of the signalling source used withGBLs.

The max_ms_dl_buffer parameter specifies the maximum size of the downlink bufferallocated to every MS in the cell.

The max_ms_dl_rate parameter specifies the maximum rate at which the SGSNtransmits downlink data to any MS in the cell.

The ns_alive_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated to establish ifa NSVC is alive.

The ns_block_retries parameter specifies the number of retries generated to block aNSVC.

The ns_unblock_retires parameter specifies the number of retries generated to unblocka NSVC.

The nsei parameter specifies the Network Service Entity Identifier (NSEI) used by theBSS over the Gb interface. There can be only one NSEI associated with each BSS.

The num_gbl_dl_thrput_samples parameter specifies the number of samples used tocompute the gbl_dl_data_thrput statistic.

The num_gbl_ul_thrput_samples parameter specifies the the number of samples usedto compute the gbl_ul_data_thrput statistic.

protect_last_ts

ra_colour

rac

smg_gb_vers

smg_um_vers

t_avg_t

t_avg_w

The protect_last_ts parameter specifies the switchability of PDTCH when there is one(and only one) switchable PDTCH on a carrier and none are reserved.When protect_last_ts is set to 1, the PDTCH may not be allocated to a voice call unlessthere is no data flowing or queued for that timeslot.When protect_last_ts is set to 0, there is no restriction and the last remaining switchablePDTCH can be taken for a voice call.

The ra_colour parameter specifies the routing area colour used in System Informationmessages for a specific cell and, therefore, indicates that GPRS is supported in the cell.

The rac parameter specifies the routing area code (RAC) which is part of the cellidentifier for GPRS cells.

The smg_gb_vers parameter specifies the SMG version being adopted by the BSS overthe Gb interface.

The smg_um_vers parameter specifies the SMG version being adopted by the BSSover the UM interface.

The t_avg_t parameter specifies the number of multiframes for C averaging in theTransfer state. (TAVG_W is the number of multiframes for C averaging in the Wait state).

The t_avg_w parameter specifies the number of multiframes for C averaging in the Waitstate. (TAVG_T is the number of multiframes for C averaging in the Transfer state).


0 or 1 0

1 to 3 3

0 to 2 2

1 to 3 3

1 to 3 3

0 or 1 1

1 to 3 3

0 to 15 0 to 15 6

1

0 to 3 0 to 3 0

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 No flow control1 XON/XOFF

2 Leaky bucket algorithm

0 First In/First Out packet scheduling1 Earliest Deadline packet

scheduling


1 Mode A2 Mode B


1 Mode A2 Mode B

0

1

0





0 or 10 Fixed mode

1 Dynamic mode

0 or 10 Fixed mode

1 Dynamic mode

0 to 7 0 to 7 1

0 to 7 0 to 7 1

0 to 7 0 to 7 3

0 to 31 0 to 31 31

1



0 to 16 1

0 to 10 1

0 or 1 0

0 to 5 1

0 to 65535 0

1600 to 20000 20000

1 to 900 900

1 to 10 3

1 to 3 3

1 to 3 3

0 to 65535 NONE

1 to 10 10

1 to 10 10

0 or 1 0

0 to 7 NONE

0 to 255 NONE

24 to 31 31

29 to 31 31

0 to 25 10

0 to 25 10

0 Last timeslot is not protected1 Last timeslot is protected

Dependencies

NO

NO

NO

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. NO


NO


The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. YES

YES



The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.The dynamic allocation of terrestrial resources

feature must be disabled for GPRS sites.This parameter prevents GPRS usage on RTFs that

are subequipped in the database.max_gprs_pdch must be enabled can not be set to

zero without first disabling allow_32k_trau.Verifications must be performed to ensure that there

are enough terrestrial resources available whenmax_gprs_pdch is increased and allow_32k_trau.

is enabled.


Dependencies The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.If the local_maintenance parameter is disabled, the


The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.If the local_maintenance parameter is disabled, the


The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.This parameter can be set to a value of 1 (mode A)

or a value of 2 (mode B) only whengprs_pc_meas_chan is set to 0 (BCCH).

This parameter cannot be set to 2 (mode B) whengprs_mac_mode is set to 1 (dynamic mode).

YES

YES

Dependencies The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.The PCU must be equipped.

max_gprs_pdch must be set to a non-zero-value.At least one nsvc must be associated with a GBL.









The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.The PCU must be equipped.

max_gprs_pdch must be set to a non-zero-value.At least one nsvc must be associated with a GBL.









The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.This parameter can not be set to 1 (dynamic mode)

when gprs_dl_pwr_mode is set to 2 (mode B).

YES




The gprs_ms_pan_dec parameter specifies the amount by which to decrement the MS

counter n3102. The MS counter n3102 counts the number of uplink acks/nacks received

by the MS. When an uplink ack/nack is received, n3102 is incremented by

gprs_ms_pan_inc. n3102 never exceeds gprs_ms_pan_max. Each time the preset

internal timer T3182 expires, n3102 is decremented by gprs_ms_pan_dec. T3182

defines how long the mobile waits for an uplink ack/nack. If n3102 decrements to zero,

then the MS performs an abnormal cell reselection procedure as defined in the GSM

standard referred to in this description.











YES



The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.Sysgen mode cannot be left until the nsei parameter

has been configured by the operator.The nsei parameter cannot be modified until all GBLs

have been locked.

YES

YES

YES

The PCU must be locked. YES

The PCU must be locked. YES

NONE NO

NONE NO

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. Queuingmust be enabled and the priority sent from the MSC

in the assignment request must be a value between 1and 14; if this is not done, the last timeslot acts like a

reserved timeslot.


If the local_maintenance flag is disabled, thisparameter cannot be changed through the MMI.


This parameter displays only when the value hasbeen set previously by the operator.

DATABASE PARAMETER

dynet_tchs_reserved

Description Valid range

0 to 32

The dynet_tchs_reserved parameter specifies the amount of terrestrial backingresources reserved for a changing cell when dynamic allocation is enabled for the sitecontaining the cell.The system rejects this parameter if the new value causes the total terrestrial backingresources for a BTS network to be less then the total reserved cell capacity. The total terrestrial backing resources for a BTS network is the sum of theterrestrial backing resources reserved on the DYNETs for the BTS network. The total reserved cell capacity for a site is the sum of the reserved capacity for allof the cells at the site minus the dedicated resources for the site. If this total isless than zero, it is set at zero. The total reserved cell capacity for a BTSnetworks is then the sum of the total reserved cell capacity of the dynamicallocation BTSs in the BTS network.


0 to 32 0

This parameter is not available unless the containingsite is configured to support dynamic allocation.

The parameter is invalid for the BSC (location 0).The system will reject the command if the cell_desc

equals all.The Dynamic Allocation option must be in operation.

NO



ber_loss_daily 3 to 6

ber_loss_hourly 3 to 6

hdsl_losw_oos 0 to 3598

hdsl_losw_restore 0 to 65534

hdsl_snr_daily 6 to 44

The ber_loss_daily parameter specifies the daily Bit Error Rate (BER) alarm threshold.An alarm is generated if the BER exceeds this threshold in a given 24 hour period.

The ber_loss_hourly parameter specifies the hourly Bit Error Rate (BER) alarmthreshold.This parameter represents the exponent of threshold BER. For example, 3 would be theexponent value of 103, indicating 1 bit error in 1000 bits.An alarm is generated if the BER exceeds this threshold in a given 60 minute period.

The hdsl_losw_oos parameter specifies the HDSL Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) out ofservice (OOS) alarm period. The system takes the HDSL link out of service if the syncword is not received for the hdsl_losw_oos period.

The hdsl_losw_restore parameter defines the HDSL Loss of Sync Word (LOSW)restoration period. If the sync word is received for the hdsl_losw_restore_period, thesystem restores the HDSL link back into service (INS).

The hdsl_snr_daily parameter defines the HDSL Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) dailyalarm level. If the SNR alarm level drops below the hdsl_snr_daily threshold for anaccumulated period of hdsl_snr_daily_mon_period within a given 24 hour period, adaily alarm is generated.

hdsl_snr_hourly 8 to 44

hdsl_snr_hourly_period 0 to 3598

hdsl_snr_oos 6 to 44

The hdsl_snr_hourly parameter sets the threshold period for the hourly signal to noiseratio (SNR). If the SNR level drops below the hdsl_snr_hourly threshold for anaccumulated period of hdsl_snr_hourly_mon_period within a given 60 minute period,an hourly alarm is generated.

The hdsl_snr_hourly_period parameter sets the threshold period for the hourly signalto noise ratio (SNR). If the SNR level drops below the hdsl_snr_hourly threshold for anaccumulated period of hdsl_snr_hourly_mon_period within a given 60 seconds period,an hourly alarm is generated.

The hdsl_snr_oos parameter specifies the SNR threshold level for the HDSL Signal toNoise Ratio (SNR). The SNL level is continuously monitored by the system. If the SNRlevel drops below the hdsl_snr_oos threshold for more than hdsl_oos_mon_period,the HDSL link is taken Out Of Service (OOS).

hdsl_snr_restore 6 to 44

land_layer1_mode 0 or 1

red_loss_daily 0 to 65535

red_loss_hourly 0 to 65535

The hdsl_snr_restore parameter specifies the SNR threshold level for the HDSL Signalto Noise Ratio (SNR). The SNL level is continuously monitored by the system. If theSNR level rises above the hdsl_snr_restore threshold for more thanhdsl_oos_mon_period, the HDSL link is restored to service.

The land_layer1_mode parameter specifies the layer 1 mode of the land networkTELCO connection type. Only the 2.048 Mbit/s – CEPT format is currently supported.All BTS site values are set to the BSC value.This parameter may be set only while in the initial SYSGEN mode. All BTS site valuesare set to BSC (site 0) value when the database is loaded initially.

The red_loss_daily parameter specifies the synchronization loss, daily alarm level counton a T1 link. An alarm generates if the synchronization loss meets or exceeds thethreshold in a given 24 hour period.

The red_loss_hourly parameter specifies the synchronization loss, daily alarm levelcount on a T1 link. An alarm generates if the synchronization loss meets or exceeds thethreshold in a given 60 minute period.

red_loss_oos 0 to 65535

red_loss_restore 0 to 65535

red_time_oos 0 to 65535

red_time_restore 0 to 65535

sync_loss_daily 0 to 65535

sync_loss_hourly 0 to 65535

sync_loss_oos 0 to 65535

The red_loss_oos parameter specifies the synchronization loss, Out Of Service (OOS)daily alarm level count for a T1 circuit. The T1 circuit is be taken OOS if thesynchronization loss meets or exceeds this threshold during a given 24 hour period.

The red_loss_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss, restorable time limitfor a T1 circuit. If a synchronization loss error does not occur within this period of time,the T1 circuit is brought back in service. The synchronization loss is controlled by thevalue assigned to the red_loss_oos parameter.

The red_time_oos parameter specifies the synchronization loss time for a T1 circuit. Ifsynchronization is lost for this period of time, the T1 circuit is taken Out Of Service(OOS).

The red_time_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss restart time for a T1link. If synchronization loss does not occur within this period of time, the T1 link returnsto service.

The sync_loss_daily parameter specifies the threshold for the synchronization loss dailyalarm level count. An alarm generates if the number of synchronization loss alarmsmeets or exceeds this threshold during a 24 hour period.

The sync_loss_hourly parameter specifies the threshold for the synchronization losshourly alarm level count . An alarm generates if the number of sync loss alarms meets orexceeds this threshold during a 60 minute period.

The sync_loss_oos parameter specifies the threshold for the synchronization loss, OutOf Service (OOS) daily alarm level count. The 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken out of service ifthe number of sync loss alarms meets or exceeds this threshold during a 24 hour period.

sync_loss_restore 0 to 65535

sync_time_oos 0 to 65535

sync_time_restore 0 to 65535

trunk_critical_threshold 0 to 100

trunk_major_threshold 0 to 99

The sync_loss_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss restorable timeperiod for a sync_loss_oos_alarm. If a synchronization loss alarm does not occurwithin this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is brought back in service.

The sync_time_oos parameter specifies the synchronization loss time period. Ifsynchronization is lost for this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken Out Of Service (OOS).

The sync_time_restore parameter specifies the synchronization loss restorable timeperiod. If synchronization returns for this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is brought back inservice.

The trunk_critical_threshold parameter specifies the severity assignment of certainalarms. The value of this parameter is a percentage of total trunk capacity.A critical alarm is assigned when the percentage of trunk capacity loss exceeds thetrunk_critical_threshold parameter value. A major alarm is assigned when thepercentage of trunk capacity loss is greater than or equal to the trunk_major_thresholdparameter value but is less than the trunk_critical_threshold parameter value.A trunk_critical_threshold value of 0 insures that Critical is always the severityassignment if there is any capacity loss.

The trunk_major_threshold parameter specifies the severity assignment of certainalarms. The value of this parameter is a percentage of total trunk capacity.A major alarm is assigned when the percentage of trunk capacity loss exceeds thetrunk_major_threshold parameter value but is less than the trunk_critical_thresholdparameter value.A minor alarm is assigned when the percentage of trunk capacity loss is less than thetrunk_major_threshold parameter value.


6 NONE

4 NONE

6

6

16

Represents the exponent of threshold BER. For example, 3

would be the exponent value of 103, indicating 1 bit error in

1000 bits.











Represents 3 dB to 22 dB, as shown below:

6 = 3 dB7 = 3.5 dB8 = 4 dB

.

.

.44 = 22 dB






18

20

14


8 = 4 dB9 = 4.5 dB10 = 5 dB

.

.

.44 = 22 dB



Changing this parameter affects all master modems

equipped as msi_type niu_hdsl at the local M-Cellsite.

All slave modem alarm thresholds are identical to the


This parameter may only be changed if the HDSL

option is unrestricted.This parameter may only be changed at

anM-Cellcity, Horizonmicro or

Horizoncompact site.Changing this parameter affects all

master modemsequipped as msi_type niu_hdsl at the

localM-Cellcity or Horizonmicro site.






equipped as msi_type niu_hdsl at the localM-Cellcity or Horizonmicro site.




6 = 3 dB7 = 3.5 dB8 = 4 dB

.

.

.44 = 22 dB

This parameter may be changed only if the HDSLoption is unrestricted.





master modem alarm thresholds.The hdsl_snr_oos threshold must be lower than

thehdsl_snr_restore threshold.

16

0

16 NONE

20 NONE

Represents 3 dB to 22 dB, as shown below:6 3 dB

7 3.5 dB8 4 dB

.

.

.44 22 dB






master modem alarm thresholds.The hdsl_snr_oos threshold must be lower than

thehdsl_snr_restore threshold.

0 2.048 Mbit/s - CEPT format (E1)1 1.544 Mbit/s - T1 link

The value of this parameter may be specified for the

BSC (site 0) only while in the initial SYSGEN mode.

The value of this parameter may not be changed if

any MSIs or BTS sites are equipped.land_layer1_mode cannot be changed to 1 (T1)

unless mms_config_type = 0.Horizonoffice BTS sites support E1 (2.048 Mbit/s -

CEPT format) BSC-BTS links only. This parameter

must be set to E1 before a Horizonoffice cabinet can

be equipped. This parameter cannot be changed at

Horizonoffice BTS sites.If the GPRS feature is unrestricted and a PCU isequipped, this parameter must be set to 0 (E1).

511 NONE

6000 NONE

25 NONE

150 NONE

16

20

511 NONE



.65535 6553.5 seconds 6553500

milliseconds



.65535 6553.5 seconds 6553500

milliseconds



.65535 6553.5 seconds 6553500

milliseconds

This parameter must be less thansync_loss_hourly.

This parameter must be greater thansync_loss_daily.

6000 NONE

25 NONE

150 NONE

50

50



.65535 6553.5 seconds 6553500

milliseconds



.65535 6553.5 seconds 6553500

milliseconds



.65535 6553.5 seconds 6553500

milliseconds

This parameter must be greater than the valueassigned to the trunk_major_threshold parameter

unless both values are set to 0.This parameter applies only to the BSC.

This parameter must be less than the value assigned

to the trunk_critical_threshold parameter unlessboth values are set to 0.


NO

NO

YES

YES

YES


YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

DATABASE PARAMETER

ciph_mode_rej_allowed

dnlk_vad_dtx

dr_ho_during_assign

early_classmark_sending

efr_enabled

max_rst_ckt_timer_exps

ni

option_alg_a5_1

option_alg_a5_2

option_alg_a5_3

option_alg_a5_4

option_alg_a5_5

option_alg_a5_6

option_alg_a5_7

option_emergency_preempt

override_speech_version

rtf_path_enable

sccp_bssap_mgt

ss7_mode

ssm_critical_overload_threshold


stat_interval

ul_audio_lev_offset

volume_control_type

Description

The efr_enabled parameter enables or disables the Enhanced Full Rate (EFR).


The ciph_mode_rej_allowed parameter enables or disables the Cipher Mode Rejectmessage to be sent to the MSC. This message generates when the Cipher ModeCommand message from the MSC specifies ciphering that the BSS cannot perform.

The dnlk_vad_dtx parameter enables or disables downlink Voice ActivatedDetection/Discontinuous Transmission (VAD/DTX) at the RXCDR or at the localtranscoding BSC.If VAD is disabled, no silence/voice detection takes place and no DTX is possible forspeech calls, regardless of the value of dl_dtx_voice_data.This parameter replaces the xcdr_d_vad_dtx command.

The dr_ho_during_assign parameter determines if a handover is handled during anassignment procedure.This parameter can only be changed at the BSC.This parameter will be copied if the copy_cell command is used.This parameter is not read if the dr_preference parameter is disabled.

The early_classmark_sending parameter specifies the following: Whether the BSS suppresses the early sending of the Classmark Update messageto the MSC. Whether an MS is allowed to send an early Classmark Change message.

The max_rst_ckt_timer_exps parameter specifies the number of times that the ResetCircuit message is repeated if there is no answer from the MSC.

The ni parameter specifies the Network Indicator (NI) that establishes a method ofdifferentiation between international and national messages.







The rtf_path_enable parameter enables or disables the RTF Fault Containment feature.

The option_emergency_preempt parameter enables or disables the emergency callpreemption option. The emergency call preemption feature enables the BSS to provideaccess for emergency calls regardless of other traffic currently on the BSS. Anemergency call is identified in the RACH burst from the MS.

The override_speech_version parameter specifies a speech version when multiplespeech versions are included in a Handover Request or Assignment message from theMSC. The choices are: The first speech version that is supported by the BSS from the list of speechversions provided by the MSC. The Full Rate speech version by preference. The Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) by preference.

The sccp_bssap_mgt parameter enables or disables ITU-TSS SCCP Management.When enabled, the BSS detects Signalling Point Inaccessible and loss of BSSAPsubsystem. The BSS also handles the following messages: User Part Unavailable(UPU), Subsystem prohibited (SSP), Subsystem Allowed (SSA), and Subsystem Test(SST). (Use with Ericsson MSC)When disabled, the BSS always responds to an SST with an SSA message. This flagshould be set only if the MSC does ITU-TSS SCCP Management.All BTS site values are set to the same value assigned to site 0.

The ss7_mode parameter specifies the type of SS#7 for the BSC. This parameterpermits the ITU or ANSI version to be selected.The ITU C7 version is consistent with the GSM specifications. The ANSI version is usedto support PCS1900 applications in the United States.This parameter can only be changed when the user is in SYSGEN ON mode. It can onlybe changed for site 0. All BTS site values are set to the same value assigned to site 0.

The ssm_critical_overload_threshold parameter indicates the usage of call informationblocks, as expressed by the ratio of the number of active calls to the maximum numberof calls the SSM can handle (400). After this threshold has been met or exceeded, noMS originated calls are allowed. The remaining SSM resources are used toaccommodate handover of existing calls. Every time the usage meets or exceeds thisthreshold, two access classes are barred. This number has to be greater than thessm_normal_overload_threshold parameter.


The stat_interval parameter sets the time, in minutes, that the statistics file is reportedto the OMC-R.If the operator fails to reset the interval to 30 minutes, the OMC-R calculations of the KeyStatistics and Health Indicators are interrupted for the entire period until the interval isreset.Although any value between 5 and 60 minutes is valid, the OMC-R only parses uploadedstatistics files if this attribute is set to 30 or 60 minutes.

The ul_audio_lev_offset parameter specifies the uplink volume control offset on a perBSS basis. The offset is in 1 dB steps with a maximum increase or decrease of 30 dB(between –15 dB and 15 dB).Changes take effect immediately (including active calls).The audio level parameters affect background and comfort noise. The audio levelparameters do not affect data.

The volume_control_type parameter enables or disables uplink and downlink VolumeControl. The volume can be changed at either an RXCDR or at a BSC. The effectdepends on the equipment configuration (GDPs or DRIs equipped), and the value ofvolume_control_type to use DRIs (0) or GDP volume control (1).


0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 to 3 0

0

0 to 100 1

0 to 3 NONE

0 or 1 0

Default value

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Enabled1 Disabled

0 Ignore the need of a handover until the

assignment procedureis complete.

1 Act on the need for a handover during the

assignmentprocedure.

0 Disabled across both the A-interface and the

Air-interface1 Enabled on A-interface, disabled on Air-interface

2 Disabled on A-interface, enabled on Air-interface

3 Enabled across both the A-interface and the

Air-interface



The value 0 means the system keeps sending the

Reset�Circuit message indefinitely.�

0 International Network1 Spare (for international

use only)2 National Network

3 Reserved for national use

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 0

0 to 2 0

0 or 1 0

0 or 1 1

0 or 1 0

0 to 100 80

0 to 100 70

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 No override (First supported speech version

assupplied by the MSC)

1 Full Rate (GSM speech full rate version 1)

2 Enhanced Full Rate (GSM speech full rate

version 2)

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 ITU version1 ANSI version

5 to 60 30

(-15 to 15) 0

0 or 1 00 CCDSP Volume Control

1 GDP Volume Control

Dependencies

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

This parameter only applies to the BSC. YES

YES

YES



Must be executed in SYSGEN mode.This parameter can be displayed or changed only atsites where transcoding is enabled (RXCDR or local

transcoding BSC).When enabled, the dnlk_vad_dtx parameter makes

the dl_dtx_voice_data parameter alive.

The MSC may need to increase the timer waiting forthe Assignment Complete message from the BSS


to the Directed Retry procedure if themsc_preference parameter indicates that directed

retry is supported only within the BSS (not across theA-interface) when the dr_standard_congest

parameter is enabled.This parameter requires the Directed Retry option.

This parameter requires that dr_preference beenabled.

The Multiband Inter-cell Handover feature must beenabled.

This parameter can only be changed at the BSC(location = 0), but it can be viewed at any site within a

specified BSS.

The EFR feature must be unrestricted.This parameter cannot be enabled if the

handover_required_sp_ver_used parameter isdisabled.

This parameter is only valid at BSC or RXCDRlocations (location = 0).

The bss_id is only valid at a RXCDR site.

The MTL must be locked then unlocked for thechange to take effect.


YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

This parameter only applies to the BSC or RXCDR. YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO







This parameter is not allowed at the RXCDR.This parameter is only applied at the BSC (location 0).

The EFR feature must be enabled to change thisparameter.

The RTF Fault Containment option must beunrestricted to use this parameter.



parameter.

The system checks the values of the opc and dpcvariables and compares them to the value of

ss7_mode. If the ranges are not compatible, thesystem rejects the changes.

This parameter requires a location value of 0 or� �bsc.� �

Must be greater than thessm_normal_overload_threshold parameter.




NO

YES

YES

Must be set to 30 or 60 minutes to align with theOMC-R.

The volume_control_type parameter controls theul_audio_lev_offset application. Ifvolume_control_type = 1, then the

ul_audio_lev_offset parameter only applies to sitesequipped with GDP boards. The GDP firmware

controls the volume level by converting the audiolevel bits for the entered offset.


The Generic DSP Processor (GDP) Volume Controlfeature must be available.

If volume_control_type is set to 1, the BSS must beequipped with GDP boards, unless remote

transcoding, when RXCDR must contain a GDPboard to serve the BSS.

CCDSP (Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor)volume control cannot be directly initiated from an

RXCDR. (There are no DRIs at the RXCDR).However, by setting the parameter to 0 at the BSCand at the RXCDR, CCDSP (DRI) volume control is

used in this BSS.The parameters ul_audio_lev_offset and

dl_audio_lev_offset must be set to 0 beforechanging volume_control_type.



bsc_type 1 or 2

cic_error_clr_threshold 0 to 253

cic_error_decrement 1 to 127

cic_error_gen_threshold 2 to 255

cic_error_increment

cic_validation yes or no

The bsc_type parameter specifies the BSC configuration type.

The cic_error_clr_threshold parameter specifies the CIC error count clearing thresholdat the BSC. When the error count reaches or falls below this threshold the alarm clears.

The cic_error_decrement parameter specifies the CIC error decrement value. Thesystem updates the CIC error count by this value whenever a successful call is made.For example, if cic_error_decrement is set to two, each successful call decreases theerror count by two and two successful calls decrease the count by four.

The cic_error_gen_threshold parameter specifies the CIC error count threshold at theBSC. Once this threshold is reached, further CIC errors do not increase the CIC errorcount. When this threshold is reached or exceeded an alarm is generated.If the error count threshold is exceeded, the error count resets to the error countthreshold value.

The cic_error_increment parameter specifies the CIC error increment value. Thesystem updates the CIC error count by this value whenever an error is detected.For example, if cic_error_increment is set to two. each detected error increases theerror count by two, so that two errors are counted as four.

0 Disabled1 to 255 CIC

error increment

value

The cic_validation parameter enables or disables the CIC (Circuit Identity Code)validation.

clk_src_fail_reset_period 1 to 255

cp_option_reset_ckt

cp_option_rr_status

cr_calling

dl_audio_lev_offset –15 to +15

The clk_src_fail_reset_period parameter specifies the length of time for which the OOScount is kept for the MMSs at a site. At the end of the reset period, all of the MMS OOScounts are reset to zero.The OOS counts are used in the selection process for an MMS as a reference clock forGCLK synchronization. If several MMSs have the same value assigned to themms_priority parameter, the MMS with the lowest OOS count is selected.

The cp_option_reset_ckt parameter enables and disables the reset circuit feature.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

The cp_option_rr_status parameter enables and disables the radio resource status.If this is enabled, the BSS can generate the 4.08 radio resource status message to theMS.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

This parameter enables or disables the calling party address being included in the SCCPmessage Connection Request.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

The dl_audio_lev_offset parameter specifies the downlink volume control offset on aper BSS basis. The offset is in 1 dB steps with a maximum increase or decrease of 30dB (between –15 dB and 15 dB).The audio level parameters affect background and comfort noise. The audio levelparameters do not affect data.

eas_alarm

eas_alarm_type 0 to 33

The eas_alarm parameter is the text component of the EAS (External Alarm System)alarm table. The EAS alarm table consists of 34 indexed pairs consisting of a textcomponent and a severity level. The text component and severity level are assignedwhen the EAS alarm table is initialized using the chg_eas_alarm command. The textcomponent of an indexed pair may only be changed using the chg_eas_alarmcommand.The index number uniquely identifies each text and severity pair in the EAS alarm table.Index numbers are required to specify which of the 34 pairs to display. Index values are 0to 33.

Up to 24 alphanumeric

characters (including spaces)

The eas_alarm_type parameter specifies one of the EAS (External Alarm System)alarm table elements to one of eight optocouplers of an addressed PIX card. Theeas_alarm_type value corresponds to the index number identifying the location of a textand severity level pair.Index numbers are required to specify which of the 34 pairs to display. Index values are0 to 33.The disp_element command displays the optocouplers and indexed alarm text andseverity pairs assigned with the map_eas_opto command.The output of the disp_element command appears in the form:eas_alarm_type = x y x y x y x y x ywhere each x corresponds to an opto# and each y corresponds to an alarm text andseverity pair.

eas_report_opto 0 or 1

eas_severity

The eas_report_opto parameter specifies whether or not each of the eight optocouplers(optos) on a specific PIX card will report state changes.Index numbers are required. Index numbers are used to identify the desired EAS device.Index values are assigned during installation.The output of the disp_element command appears in the form:eas_report_opto = 1 = ON 2 = ON 3 = OFF 4 = ON 5 = OFF 6 = ON 7 = ON 8 = ONwhere 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, and 8 report state changes but 3 and 5 do not.

The eas_severity parameter specifies the severity level component of the EAS (ExternalAlarm System) alarm table.The index number uniquely identifies each text and severity pair in the EAS alarm table.The EAS alarm table consists of 34 indexed pairs consisting of a text component and aseverity level. The text component and severity level are assigned when the EAS alarmtable is initialized using the chg_eas_alarm command. The severity component may bechanged using either the chg_element or the chg_eas_alarm command. If thechg_eas_alarm command is used, it permits the alarm text to be changed at the sametime.“Clear” is a valid alarm condition, but it is not a valid alarm severity setting. All alarms ofseverity levels 0 to 4 can receive a “clear” indication for the original pegging of an alarmwhen a system is running.

0 to 40 Investigate


4 Warning

gclk_qwarm_flag 0 or 1

global_reset_repetitions 0 to 255

gproc_slots

The gclk_qwarm_flag parameter specifies the amount of time required by the activeGCLK to warm up. It has no effect on the standby GCLK. If this parameter is disabled, the active GCLK with hardware revision 9 or greaterwill require 15 minutes to warm up, while older GCLKs will require 30 minutes. If this parameter is enabled, the software overrides the hardware timer on theactive GCLK and brings it into service after 15 minutes using the Fast GCLKWarmup feature. This 15 minute period begins when the site is initialized.This parameter is only valid for GCLK boards.

The global_reset_repetitions parameter allows the “Reset” message to be sentindefinitely if Reset Ack is not received, or stops sending the “Reset” message after afixed number of repetitions. The global reset procedure repeats is only if the MSC fails toacknowledge the BSS. After the fixed number of repetitions, an alarm is generated.If the value is set to 0, the global reset message repeats continuously until a Reset Ack isreceived.If the value is set to a value greater than 0, the global reset message repeats the numberof times entered and the alarm: No MSC Acknowledgement for Global Reset isgenerated.

The gproc_slots parameter specifies the number of timeslots to be allocated to allGPROCs for the TDM highway. It is possible to configure different functions on each ofthe 32 channels. The system supports 16 or 32 timeslots for assignment to the TDMhighway.This parameter is not allowed at Horizonoffice BTS sites. 32 timeslots are automaticallyassigned to the TDM highway for Horizonoffice sites.This parameter is not allowed at M-Cell sites.


32 32 TDM timeslots

(only valid with

GPROC2 boards).

0 or 1

illegal_circuit_id 0 to 65535

ksw_config 0 to 3

local_maintenance 0 or 1

group_block_unblock_allowed

The group_block_unblock_allowed parameter allows the operator to make the Ainterface more efficient, by enabling support of the group blocking/unblocking procedure,if MSC supports circuit group block and unblock messages.This parameter is only valid at the BSC (location = 0).If this parameter is enabled, the following ‘group block’ messages are sent to the MSC: Circuit Group Block Circuit Group UnblockIf this parameter is disabled, the following ‘single circuit block’ messages are sent to theMSC: Block Unblock

The illegal_circuit_id parameter is used as an identifier to describe a circuit that isnever used. This parameter is used as an internal place holder in call processing toshow that no circuit has been assigned to a call. The value may be changed to permit acustomer to specify the circuit ID to be used as the illegal_circuit_id. If the value is notchanged, a Motorola specified illegal_circuit_id is assigned.

The ksw_config parameter specifies the order in which the timeslots are borrowed fromneighbouring cages. Each KSW pair provides 1024 timeslots. When there are no moretimeslots available, the system borrows timeslots from neighbouring cages.

The local_maintenance parameter specifies whether or not database elements that canbe configured via the OMC-R interface can be modified from a local maintenanceterminal or from an rlogin. This is used to synchronize the database in the BSS and thedata modelled in the OMC-R MIB.

lta_alarm_range 1 to 255

ltu_fw_auto_download 0 or 1

mmi_cell_id_format 0 or 1

The lta_alarm_range parameter specifies the alarm range on the allowed Long TermAverage (LTA) variation. Temperature changes can cause the frequency generated bythe VCXO (Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator) to vary. The default range (7) issufficient to compensate for normal day to day variations in temperature. This valueshould not be changed unless it is known that the MMS or uplink clock is faulty.The LTA is a rolling average of the values read from the clock frequency register(CLKFREQ) of each GCLK once every half hour after synchronization if the GCLK isphase locked. Up to 48 clock frequency readings are stored. These stored readings areused to calculate the LTA. An alarm will be generated if 25% or more of the storedreadings differ from the calculated LTA by more than the value that is specified by thelta_alarm_range parameter.The CLKFREQ register is used to maintain the correct frequency generated by theVCXO (Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator). The register centre value is 80h.

The ltu_fw_auto_download parameter specifies if Horizonoffice HDSL modem devicesare to be downloaded automatically with new firmware when it is made available.A warning prompt displays when this parameter is enabled:WARNING: RF Unit MMSs will be cycled if a firmware download is requiredAre you sure (y=yes,n=no)?

The mmi_cell_id_format parameter specifies the format that the MMI command lineaccepts for the GSM Cell Identification number. The formats available are: 4-parameterand 7-parameter.

mms_cat_enable 0 or 1

mms_config_type 0 or 1

The mms_cat_enabled parameter enables or disables the MMS Critical AlarmThreshold (CAT).When enabled, the MMS CAT triggers if alarm conditions cause the MMS to go in andout of service 10 times within a 10 minute period. The MMS then is taken out of serviceuntil a lock-unlock is performed. When the MMS is returned to service, the MMS CATmessage displays.When disabled, the MMS remains in service even if the MMS CAT is met or exceeded.

The mms_config_type parameter specifies the signalling type for all MMSs. Thesignalling type depends on the carrier type being used, E1 or T1. This value may not bechanged after the database is initially loaded.The parameter may only be set while in the initial SYSGEN ON mode. All BTS site orPCU values are set to the value assigned to the BSC (site 0) or PCU (pcu) when thedatabase is initially loaded.

msc_qt

mtl_loadshare_granularity 0 or 1

pcr_enable 0 or 1

pcr_n1 32 to 127

The msc_qt parameter specifies a defined idle bit pattern for use by the Transcoder RateAdaption Unit (TRAU) and the MSC.The idle pattern is defined in the GSM specification (see References below) as:The idle pattern must be transmitted on every timeslot that is not assigned to achannel, and on every timeslot of a channel that is not allocated to a call. The idlepattern should be 01010100.The binary pattern 01010100 corresponds to decimal 84 which is the default value of thisparameter.This parameter must correspond to the MSC value for an idle PCM sample on the Ainterface. When the XCDR receives this value from the MSC in all PCM samples in its20 ms frame, it outputs a TRAU idle speech frame. In the uplink, this parameter sets thevalue of PCM that the XCDR outputs to the MSC before the XCDR has achieved TRAUsync with the CCU in the DRI.Once this value has been set to match the MSC idle pattern, it does not require anyfurther changes.

0 to 255 (representing bit patterns

00000000 to 11111111)

The mtl_loadshare_granularity parameter sets the loadshare granularity across MTLlinks.

The pcr_enable parameter enables or disables the PCR error correction method. Thismethod is used when transferring messages between the MSC and the BSC (via the Ainterface).If PCR is enabled, then: ss7_l2_t7 > 800 milliseconds. ss7_l3_t2 > 1400 milliseconds.

The pcr_n1 parameter specifies the maximum number of message units to be retainedfor retransmission for the PCR Error Correction method.

pcr_n2 950 to 3750

phase2_classmark_allowed 0 to 2

0 or 1

phase_lock_gclk 0 or 1

pool_gproc_preemption 0 to 2

rci_error_clr_threshold 0 to 253

The pcr_n2 parameter specifies the maximum number of message unit octets to beretained for retransmission for the PCR Error Correction method.

The phase2_classmark_allowed parameter defines the format of the classmarkparameter sent to the MSC based on GSM phases.

phase2_resource_ind_allowed

The phase2_resource_ind_allowed parameter specifies the GSM Phase format theBSS uses to send Resource Request messages to the MSC.If this parameter is set to 0, the BSS sends the messages in the GSM Phase 1 format.If this parameter is set to 1, the BSS sends the messages in the GSM Phase 2 format.

The phase_lock_gclk parameter enables or disables phase locking for the GCLK boardat a site.Phase locking means the GCLK board is synchronized with the clock of the MMSselected as determined by the mms_priority value. The mms_priority value is specifiedusing the modify_value command.

The pool_gproc_preemption parameter specifies what type of preemption to use forpool GPROCs.When a pool GPROC running a function goes OOS and there are no available poolGPROCs, the INS pool GPROCs can be searched for a lower priority function. If such afunction is found, it is “bumped” from its GPROC by the higher priority function.

The rci_error_clr_threshold parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI)error count clearing threshold at the BSC. When the error count reaches or falls belowthis threshold the alarm clears.

rci_error_decrement 1 to 127

rci_error_gen_threshold 2 to 255

rci_error_increment 0 to 255

remote_loss_daily 0 to 65535

remote_loss_hourly 0 to 65535

The rci_error_decrement parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI) errordecrement value. The system updates the RCI error count by this value whenever asuccessful call is made.For example, if rci_error_decrement is set to 2. each successful call decreases theerror count by two, so that two successful calls would decrease the count by 4.

The rci_error_gen_threshold parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI)error count threshold at the BSC. When this threshold is reached or exceeded an alarmgenerates.Once this threshold is reached, further RCI errors do not increase the RCI error count. Ifthe error count threshold is exceeded, the error count resets to the error count thresholdvalue.

The rci_error_increment parameter specifies the Radio Channel Identifier (RCI) errorincrement value. The system will update the RCI error count by this value whenever anerror is detected.For example, if rci_error_increment is set to 2. each detected error increases the errorcount by two, so that two errors are counted as 4.

The remote_loss_daily parameter specifies the threshold for the daily count of remotealarms.An alarm generates if this threshold is met or exceeded during a 24 hour period.

The remote_loss_hourly parameter specifies the threshold for the hourly count ofremote alarms.An alarm generates if this threshold is met or exceeded during a 60 minute period.

remote_loss_oos 0 to 65535

remote_loss_restore 0 to 65535

remote_time_oos 0 to 65535

remote_time_restore 0 to 65535

sap_audit_type 0 to 2, 255

sap_device_type N/A

The remote_loss_oos parameter specifies the Out of Service (OOS) threshold for theremote alarmWhen this threshold is met or exceeded, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken OOS.

The remote_loss_restore parameter specifies the wait time for restoring the 2 Mbit/scircuit to service.If no remote alarm indication errors are detected during this wait time, the 2 Mbit/s circuitreturns to service.

The remote_time_oos parameter specifies the remote alarm time period. If a remotealarm exists for this amount of time, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken Out Of Service (OOS).

The remote_time_restore parameter sets the remote alarm restorable time. If theremote alarm ceases for this period of time, the 2 Mbit/s circuit returns to service.

The sap_audit_type parameter specifies the type of audit to be run on a device at aspecific site.

The sap_device_type parameter specifies the type of device on which an audit runs at aspecific site.

sap_end_time

sap_interval

sap_start_time

slip_loss_daily 0 to 65535

slip_loss_hourly 0 to 65535

slip_loss_oos 0 to 65535

slip_loss_restore 0 to 65535

The sap_end_time parameter specifies the ending time for a device audit.When this parameter is displayed using the disp_element command, the time ispresented in military standard time or GMT (such as sap_end_time = 13:45).

Hours 0 to 23Minutes 0 to

59

The sap_interval parameter specifies the interval for a device audit.When this parameter is displayed using the disp_element command, the time ispresented in military standard time or GMT (such as sap_interval = 13:45).


59

The sap_start_time parameter specifies the start time for a device audit.When this parameter is displayed using the disp_element command, the time ispresented in military standard time or GMT (such as sap_end_time = 13:45).


59

The slip_loss_daily parameter specifies the threshold for the frame slip daily alarmcount. An alarm generates if the count of frame slips meets or exceeds this threshold ina 24 hour period.

The slip_loss_hourly parameter specifies the threshold for the frame slip hourly alarmlevel count. An alarm generated if the count of frame slips exceeds this threshold in a 60minute period.

The slip_loss_oos parameter specifies the threshold for the frame slip out of service(OOS) alarm level count. The 2 Mbit/s circuit is taken out of service if the number offrame slips exceeds this threshold during a 24 hour period.

The slip_loss_restore parameter specifies the frame slip restorable time period. If noerrors occur during this period, the 2 Mbit/s circuit is brought back into service.

ssp_burst_delay 0 to 2500

0 to 100

ssp_burst_delay 0 to 2500

ssp_burst_limit 1 to 65535

swfm_enable 0 or 1





The ssp_burst_limit parameter specifies the number of messages included in eachburst. The length of time between bursts is specified by the ssp_burst_delayparameter.Statistical information is forwarded from the Site Statistical Process (SSP) to the CentralStatistical Process (CSP) in bursts.

The swfm_enable parameter enables or disables Software Fault Management (SWFM)alarm messages to be reported to all local MMI terminals that have alarm reportingenabled.This parameter affects the entire BSS.

unequipped_circuit_allowed 0 to 2

wait_for_reselection 0 to 86400

The unequipped_circuit_allowed parameter specifies the system response when aterrestrial circuit becomes unequipped. The options are: Sending an alarm to the OMC-R. Sending an “unequipped circuit” message to the MSC. Sending both an alarm to the OMC-R and an “unequipped circuit” message to theMSC.

The wait_for_reselection parameter specifies the length of time before choosing anMMS for clock extraction after a GCLK has had a CLKX reference failure alarm. If theMMS providing clock extraction is INS after the time period has expired, it is left as theclock extraction source.

Value description Dependencies

1 NO

0 to 253 0 YES

1 to 127 1 YES

2 to 255 6 YES

1 NONE YES

yes or no NONE YES

Default value


1 Non Abis, only BSP and LCF

2 Non Abis, BSP, LCF and OMF

The value of this parameter may be specified for the

BSC (site 0) only while in the initial SYSGEN mode.

This command is only available for the BSC

(location=0).

cic_error_clr_threshold must be less thancic_error_rate_monitor.


cic_error_decrement must be greater than or equal

to two.

cic_error_gen_threshold must be larger than

cic_error_clr_threshold.cic_error_gen threshold minus

cic_error_clr_threshold, divided bycic_error_decrement must be greater

than or equalto two.

cic_error_gen_threshold must be larger than

cic_error_clr_threshold.cic_error_gen threshold minus thecic_error_clr_threshold, divided by

cic_error_decrement must be greater than or equal

to two.


This parameter may not be changed if the dynamic

allocation mode is enabled.

1 to 255 24 NONE NO

0 NONE NO

1 NONE NO

NONE NO

–15 to +15 0 YES




This parameter only applies to the BSC (location =

0).

The volume_control_type parameter controls the

dl_audio_lev_offset application: If volume_control_type = 0, then the

dl_audio_lev_offset parameter does not have

any effect at RXCDR sites. If volume_control_type = 1, then thedl_audio_lev_offset parameter only

applies tosites equipped with GDP boards. The

GDPfirmware controls the volume level byconverting the audio level bits for the

enteredoffset.

NONE NONE NO

0 to 33 NONE NONE NO

Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (including

spaces)

NONE NONE NO

NONE NONE NO

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 40 Investigate


4 Warning

0 YES

0 to 255 NONE YES

16 YES


The Fast GCLK Warmup feature must beunrestricted.

The GCLK version must be V9 or later.

This parameter does not apply to RXCDR sites.

This parameter applies to only BSC sites.

16 or 3216 16 TDM timeslots32 32 TDM timeslots

(only valid with GPROC2 boards).

This parameter may not be modified if any BSP, BTP,

DHP, GPROC, or MSI is equipped.

0 YES


None YES

1 YES

0 Disabled - BSS sends only single circuit�

block/unblock messages �to the MSC.

1 Enabled - BSS sends only group block/unblock� �messages to the MSC.

This parameter is only valid at the BSC.This parameter does not apply to RXCDR

sites.

Changing this parameter is not allowed at M-Cellsites.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

Place the system in the SYSGEN ON mode before

using the chg_element command to change thisparameter.

7 NONE YES

1

0 YES

0 Disabled1 Enabled

This parameter is valid only at Horizonoffice sites.

0 7-parameter format1 4-parameter format

The system must be in SYSGEN ON mode to modifythis parameter.

PCS1900 systems accept only the four parameter

cell number format.This parameter is valid only at the BSC.

0 NONE YES

0 YES

0 Disabled1 Enabled

If land_layer1_mode = 0 (2.048 Mbit/s E1 link)

then:0 CRC-4

1 No CRC-4If land_layer1_mode = 1

(1.544 Mbit/s T1 link) then:0 ESF

The value of the land_layer1_mode parameter:

S For E1 systems (land_layer1_mode =0), the

value of this parameter can be changed at any

time for any site. If executed outside SYSGEN

mode, a warning message saying the MMSs

must be reset to have the change take effect at

that site will display.S mms_config_type cannot be changed

to 1 ifland_layer1_mode = 1 (T1).

The value of mms_config_type must be the same at

the BSC and the PCU sites.

Place the system in SYSGEN ON mode YES

0 YES

0 YES


84 (represent

ing bit pattern

01010100)

0 16 virtual circuits (regular granularity)1 64 virtual circuits

(enhanced granularity)

If the element is changed in SYSGEN ON mode, the

change takes effect immediately.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

This parameter only applies to the BSC.You must reset the BSC when changing

thisparameter for the change to take effect.



None This parameter only applies to the BSC. YES

0 NONE YES


0 YES

0 Formatted for Phase 11 Formatted for Phase 22 Formatted for Phase 2

with Multiband

0 GSM Phase 1 format1 GSM Phase 2 format

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 No replacement1 Replacement based

on function priority2 Replacement based

on function and intrafunction

priorities

rci_error_gen threshold minusrci_error_clr_threshold, divided by the

rci_error_decrement must be greater than or equal

to 2.This parameter only applies to the BSC

or RXCDR.

1 YES

6 YES

1 YES

16 NONE YES

20 NONE YES



to 2.This parameter only applies to the BSC

or RXCDR.



to 2.This parameter applies only to the BSC

or RXCDR.

0 = disable this feature1 to 255 =

rci_error_increment value


511 NONE YES

6000 NONE YES

5 NONE YES

5 NONE YES

255 YES

NONE NONE YES

0 0 seconds 0 milliseconds

1 0.1 seconds 100 milliseconds


. 6000 600 seconds

600000 milliseconds.





. 6000 600 seconds






. 6000 600 seconds



0 Safe (Safe Tests)1 int_lpbk (Internal Loopback Tests)

2 Self test255 No audit

NONE NONE YES

NONE NONE YES

NONE NONE YES

4 NONE NO

10

255 NONE YES

6000 NONE NO




This parameter must be greater thanslip_loss_daily.


1 0.1 second 100 milliseconds

. 6000 600 seconds



250 NONE NO

70 NO

200 NONE NO

10 NONE NO

0 This parameter applies only to a BSC. NO

Must be less than thessm_critical_overload_threshold

parameter.This parameter applies only to a BSC.

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 NO

10 NONE YES

0 Send alarm to the OMC-R

1 Send unequipped circuit message to the

MSC2 Send alarm to the OMC-R and send

unequippedcircuit message to the

MSC


This parameter applies only to a BSC.The Phase 2 optional feature which must

bepurchased.



confusion_msg_allowed

This parameter enables and disables the BSS to bar all access classes when anOVERLOAD message is received at the MSC.

The confusion_msg_allowed parameter enables and disables the BSS to sendConfusion messages over the A interface when an erroneous message is received fromthe MSC. If this parameter is not enabled, the system generates an alarm instead ofsending a message to the MSC.

Valid range Dependencies

0 or 1 0 NO

0 NO

Value description

Default value

Supported by OMC-R

GUI

0 Disabled1 Enabled

This parameter is valid only at a BSC.

0 Disabled1 Enabled



This parameter only applies to the BSC (location =

0).


antenna_select

ber_oos_mon_period

ber_restore_mon_period

bsc_cbc_operator


The antenna_select parameter specifies the first antenna attached to a transceiver.

The ber_oos_mon_period parameter specifies the length of time that an in serviceMMS must be above a specified Bit Error Rate (BER) before it is taken Out Of Service(OOS). The default value for this parameter is assigned when MMSs are equippedautomatically on the equipping of an MSI.

The ber_restore_mon_period parameter specifies the length of time that an out ofservice MMS must be at a 0.000001 Bit Error Rate (BER) before it is put in service. Thedefault value for this parameter is assigned when MMSs are equipped automatically onthe equipping of an MSI.

The bsc_cbc_operator parameter specifies the BSC CBC operator.

When the bss_msc_overload_allowed parameter is enabled, the BSS bars allaccesses classes if it receives an OVERLOAD message.

cabinet_type The cabinet_type parameter specifies the cabinet type.

cavity

cbc_operator The cbc_operator parameter specifies the CBC operator.

cell_zone

chan_alloc_priority

cic_validation The cic_validation parameter enables or disables CIC validation.

The cavity parameter specifies the cavity number within the COMB device that will beused by the DRI.

The cell_zone parameter specifies the zone to which an RTF belongs in a concentric cellenvironment. If the GPRS feature is in use, GPRS carriers must be in the outer zone ofa concentric cell.

The chan_alloc_priority parameter specifies the channel allocation priority of aninservice carrier.�

clkx0

clkx1

clkx2

combiner_address

combiner_id

combining_type

cs34_enabled

ext_timeslots

The clkx0 parameter specifies whether or not a CLKX (Clock Extender) half-size board ispresent for this GCLK (Generic Clock) board. For GCLK 0, the CLKX board should be inslot U7. For GCLK 1, the CLKX board should be in slot U4.



The combiner_address parameter specifies the message routing address for theCombiner (COMB).

The combiner_id parameter specifies the identity of the COMB device the DRI uses forcombining.

The combining_type parameter specifies what type of combining is associated witheach DRI.

The cs34_enabled parameter enables or disables the 32 kbps TRAU feature on theBSS.

The ext_timeslots parameter specifies the number of extended range timeslots for anRTF.

fm_cell_type

frequency_type

hdsl_modem_setting

The fm_cell_type parameter specifies the type of cell structure supported at the BTS inwhich a specific DRI is equipped.

The frequency_type parameter specifies the frequencies allowed for a cabinet.

The hdsl_modem_setting parameter specifies the setting of an integrated HDSLmodem. The possible settings are slave and master.

hdsl_oos_mon_period

hdsl_restore_mon_period

ias_connected

int_antenna

int_hdsl_modem

lapd_k

lapd_n200

lapd_t200_timer

max_cbls

max_dris

An in-service HDSL link is continuously monitored for the Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)level defined by hdsl_snr_oos. If the SNR level falls below this threshold for more thanthe period specified by the hdsl_oos_mon_period device parameter, the HDSL link istaken out of service.

An Out Of Service (OOS) HDSL link is continuously monitored for the Signal to NoiseRatio (SNR) level defined by hdsl_snr_restore. If the SNR level is maintained abovethis threshold for more than the period specified by the hdsl_restore_mon_perioddevice parameter, the HDSL link is brought back into service.

The ias_connected parameter enables or disables internal alarms system (IAS).

The int_antenna parameter specifies whether or not the cabinet contains an internalintegrated antenna.

The int_hdsl_modem parameter indicates whether or not an internal HDSL modem ispresent in the cabinet.

The lapd_k parameter specifies the maximum number of unacknowledged LAPDinformation frames.

The lapd_n200 parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of a frame.

The lapd_t200_timer parameter specifies the LAPD T200 timer. The LAPD T200 timeris used to time the acknowledgement of a transmitted frame.

The max_cbls parameter specifies the the maximum number of CBLs that may besupported by an LCF.

This max_dris parameter specifies the maximum number of DRIs supported by thespecified GPROC device or function (BTP, DHP or BTF).

max_gprs_pdch

max_gsls

max_mtls

mms_priority

The max_gprs_pdch parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs configuredon the carrier. The value of max_gprs_pdch includes both switchable and reservedGPRS timeslots.

The max_gsls parameter specifies the maximum number of GSLs that can beconfigured on the LCF.

The max_mtls parameter specifies the maximum number of MTLs supported by a BSPor LCF.

The mms_priority parameter sets the priority rating for an MMS. It determines itspossible use as a reference source to which the GCLK may phase lock. The higher thepriority value, the more likely the MMS is to be used as a reference source to which theGCLK device will frequency lock.

msi_type

n391

n392

n393

nbit

ne_id The ne_id parameter specifies the network identity.

opto_reporting

pref_rtf_id

The msi_type parameter specifies a database value for a single equipped device orfunction at a site for all equipped devices or functions of the type specified in thecommand.

The n391 parameter specifies the value for the frame relay default full status pollingcounter.

The n392 parameter specifies the frame relay default value for error threshold counter.

The n393 parameter specifies the frame relay default value for monitored events counter.

The nbit parameter enables and disables the second remote alarm bit (nbit). The defaultvalue for this parameter is automatically assigned when the MSI is equipped.

The opto_reporting parameter allows the operator to modify the reporting status andexternal alarm string mapping for DRI and EAS optocouplers.

The pre_rtf_id specifies a preferred RTF identifier. This allows at least one carrier unitper cabinet that is able to provide GPRS feature service.

res_gprs_pdch

rsl_rate

The res_gprs_pdch parameter specifies the number of PDCHs reserved on the carrierfor GPRS use only. These PDCHs are never switched to circuit use, except foremergency calls.

The rsl_rate parameter specifies the signalling and control information rate of the RadioSignal Link (RSL).

The sd_load parameter specifies the maximum number of timeslots to be configured asSDCCHs on an RTF. The BSS configures the SDCCHs on the carriers with the highestpriority, up to their SDCCH load.

sd_priority

shared_timeslots

slot

start_ts

t391

t392

tcu_port

tru_id

trx_pwr_red

The sd_priority parameter specifies the SDCCH placement priority for an RTF. TheBSS configures the SDCCHs on the carriers with the highest priority, up to their SDCCHload.

The shared_timeslots parameter reserves timeslots for use when a DYNET device hasbeen equipped for dynamic allocation of BTSs.

The slot parameter specifies the slot in which the DRI device is fitted.

The start_ts parameter specifies the first GBL timeslot on the E1/T1 link.

The t391 parameter specifies the frame relay default link integrity verification pollingtimer.

The t392 parameter is the frame relay default polling verification timer.

The tcu_port parameter specifies the port to which a TCU is connected.

The tru_id parameter specifies up to six TRUs (TopCell Radio Units) in a TopCell site. Avalue of 0 indicates this is a non-TopCell site.

The trx_pwr_red parameter specifies the TRX transmit power reduction value.


1 to 6 None

1 to 60 1

1 to 18000 6000

None

0 or 1 0

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 23 None

0 to 5 None

None

0 or 1 0

0 to 250 0

yes or no None

0 bts4d_48v1 bts4d_27v2 bssc_48v3 bssc_27v4 bts_dab5 bssc_dab6 excell_47 excell_68 topcell9 bts_510 m_cell_211 m_cell_612 tcu_213 tcu_614 m_cell_micro15 m_cellcity16 m_cellarena17 horizonoffice18 horizonmacro19 horizonmacro_ext20 m_cellarena_macro22 horizonmicro223 horizoncompact2

Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

0 Outer zone1 Inner zone

0 Highest priority250 Lowest priority

yes or no no

yes or no no

yes or no no

0 to 255 None

0 to 13 None

0 to 2 0

0 or 1 0

0 to 4 0

yes Presentno Not present



0 None1 Non-controlling2 Controlling

0 Disabled1 Enabled

0 to 4 None

1 to 15 None

slave or master None

diversity_flag fm_cell_type Result0 0 Non-diversity (RCUs only)0 1 Use branch 1 of a DRCU in a nondiversity�mode0 2 Use branch 2 of a DRCU in a nondiversity�mode1 3 Shared diversity1 4 Full diversity

1 PGSM2 EGSM3 PGSM and EGSM4 DCS18005 PGSM and DCS18006 EGSM and DCS18007 PGSM, EGSM and DCS18008 PCS19009 PGSM and PCS190010 EGSM and PCS190011 PGSM, EGSM and PCS190012 DCS1800 and PCS190013 PGSM, DCS1800 and PCS190014 EGSM, DCS1800 and PCS190015 PGSM, EGSM, DCS1800 and PCS1900

0 to 3598 20

0 to 65534 20

yes or no yes

yes or no no

yes or no no

1 to 10 7

1 to 5 3

1400 to 5000 2500

0 or 1 None

0 to 6 None

yes Enabledno Disabled

yes Internal antenna is present and should be used.no Internal antenna is not present.


(in 50 millisecond increments)

0 to 6 for BTF1 to 6 for DHP

0 to 8 0

0 to 6 0

0 to 2 None

0 to 255 None

0 MMS is not used as a clock extraction source.1 Lowest priority255 Highest priority

0 (msi) None

1 to 255 6

1 to 10 3

1 to 10 3

0 or 1 0

1 to 128 None

off or on None

0 to 11, null� � None

1 (xcdr)2 (gdp)3 (niu)7 (ext_hdsl)8 (niu_hdsl)9 (niu_ext_hdsl)12 (RF_unit)

0 Disabled1 Enabled


0 to 8 None

64 = 64 kbit/s rate None

0 to 2 None

16 = 16 kbit/s rate

0 BCCH EGSM extension band carrier whenegsm_bcch_sd is 0 (off)0 to 2 BCCH EGSM extension band carrier whenegsm_bcch_sd is 1 (on)2 BCCH extended range celln/a BCCH inner zone carrier2 All other types of BCCH carrier0 Non-BCCH EGSM extension band carrier0 Non-BCCH extended range cell0 Non-BCCH inner zone carrier2 All other types of nonBCCH carrier�

0 to 250

0 to 31

0 to 31

1 to 31 None

5 to 29 10

6 to 30 15

0 to 5 None

0 or 1 None

0 highest priority250 lowest priority

Non-BCCH default = 0

BCCH default = 0

0 to 31 E1 link0 to 23 T1 link

0 (no timeslots reserved)

0 to 31 E1 link0 to 23 T1 link

0 (no timeslots reserved)

0 Non-TopCell unit1 to 6 TopCell ID

0 to 21 or 0 to 6 for M-Cellmicro sites

The current value of

max_tx_bts.

Dependencies

YES

None YES

None YES

This parameter only applies to the BSC. YES

None No


The transceiver must be locked when modifying thisparameter.

YES

No

This parameter only applies to the BSC (location = 0). No

YES

None YES

None YES

When changing the cabinet type, the new cabinet typemust be in the same cabinet group as the old cabinet

type.The cabinet type may not be modified from

M-Cellarena, M-Cellarenamacro, to M-Cellcity orM-Cellmicro if frequency hopping is enabled at the site.The system rejects an attempt to alter the cabinet typefrom M-Cellcity, M-Cellarena, or M-Cellarenamacro toM-Cellmicro if any MSIs of type niu_hdsl are equipped

at the M-Cellcity, M-Cellarena or M-Cellarenamacrosites.

The cabinet type may not be modified to M-Cell2 ifthere are any MSI devices equipped in slots other than0, or if there are any MSI devices with a first device id

greater than 1.The system rejects the modify_value cabinet_type

command if the change is from TCU_6 to TCU_2, andthe cabinet has at least one DRI equipped via the

FMUX. A DRI that uses an FMUX as the TCUconnection type cannot be equipped to a TCU_2

cabinet.If a modify_value command from M-Cellcity,

M-Cellarena or M-Cellarenamacro to M-Cellmicro isaccepted, all the hdsl parameters initially set by the

chg_element command are set to their defaults.If a cabinet type of Horizonmicro or Horizoncompact isentered during CAB device equipage, then the CAB IDentered must be 0 if CAB device 0 does not yet exist.

The bts_type per SITE element is set to 1 uponequipage of a slave Horizonmicro or Horizoncompact

CAB device.The valid CAB ID range at a Horizonmicro BTS site is 0

to 2.The modification of cabinet_type value from m_cell_6or m_cell_2 to Horizonmacro and TCU-6 or TCU-2 tohorizonmacro_ext while the cabinet frequency_type

includes PCS1900 is allowed. All DRIs must beunequipped prior to the modification.

If the combining_type is 0, the combiner_id andcavity values are considered invalid and no

modifications are allowed.If the combining_type is 1 or 2, the combiner_id andcavity number are required and will be prompted. If

these values have already been specified, the existingvalues can be used as defaults.

All affected devices must be locked.

The Concentric Cells feature must be enabled andinner_zone_alg must be set to other than 0.

Only non-BCCH carriers can be configured in the innerzone.


Not applicable at Horizonoffice sites. YES



No

No

No

YES

YES

The address must be unique within a site.All affected devices must be locked.









The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.This parameter can be disabled only if no RTF in the

BSS is using allow_32k_trau.

The number of extended range timeslots can bechanged only if the Extended Range Cells feature is

unrestricted.The number of extended range timeslots cannot be

modified for inner-zone carriers.An RTF having one or more extended range

timeslots configured cannot have the cell_zonechanged to inner.

If the Extended Range Cell feature is enabled, thenumber of extended range timeslots for the BCCH

RTF must support the number of configured BCCH,CCCH, and SDCCH channels.


YES

YES

YES

Setting of this parameter depends on the setting ofdiversity_flag . See the table of values below.

If any of the frequency types specified are not valid atthe BSS, the system rejects the modify_value

command. Valid frequency types at a BSS can bemodified or displayed by the freq_types_allowed

command.S Frequency_types can be added and deleted in

SYSGEN ON mode.S Frequencies can be added but not deleted in

SYSGEN OFF mode.


This parameter may only be changed at anM-Cellcity, Horizonmicro or Horizoncompact site.This parameter may only be changed on MMS

devices with a protocol type of HDSL equipped asmsi_type of niu_hdsl.

The hdsl_modem_setting value cannot be modifiedwhen the MMS is in a PATH. To alter the values

would require unequipping all the PATH devices usingthis MMS, altering the values, then equipping the

PATH devices.The hdsl_modem_setting value cannot be modified

for a GPRS PCU MMS.

YES

YES

Not allowed for Horizonoffice sites. YES

YES

YES

YES

None YES

YES

None No

None YES



devices with a protocol type of HDSL, a modemsetting of master, and equipped on an msi_type of

niu_hdsl.All slave modem alarm thresholds are identical to the

master modem alarm thresholds.The hdsl_oos_mon_period value cannot be

modified for a GPRS PCU MMS.



devices with a protocol type of HDSL, a modemsetting of master, and equipped on an msi_type of

niu_hdsl.All slave modem alarm thresholds are identical to the

master modem alarm thresholds.The hdsl_restore_mon_period value cannot be

modified for a GPRS PCU MMS.

This parameter is only allowed for M-Cellcity andHorizonmicro cabinets.

This parameter is only allowed for M-Cellcity, Horizonmicro and Horizoncompact cabinets.

The operator needs to cycle (lock and then unlock) thedevice for the change to take effect.

The minimum value for this parameter should be 800milliseconds when using satellite links.

No

No

None YES

None Yes

Only one GPRS carrier is allowed for each cell.The carrier is a GPRS carrier if max_gprs_pdch is

not equal to 0.max_gprs_pdch may not be smaller than

res_gprs_pdch.All GPRS timeslots on the GPRS carrier must have

the same Frequency Hopping Indicator (FHI).If the Concentric Cells feature is unrestricted, the

GPRS carrier must be in the outer zoneAll GPRS timeslots on the GPRS carrier must have

the same Training Sequence Code.The value of max_gprs_pdch is limited by the

following settings:S BCCH carriers have a reduced number oftimeslots available. The number of CCCH

timeslots configured is indicated by the valueof the ccch_conf element.

S Non-BCCH RTFs with associated 16kbpsRSLs have a reduced number of timeslots

available.S Sub-equipped RTFs have a reduced number of

timeslots available.S When the Extended Range Cell feature is

enabled, the number of extended rangetimeslots together with the requested numberof GPRS timeslots must not exceed the carrier

capacity.S GPRS cannot be used on an extended range

timeslot.S The maximum number of GPRS timeslotstogether with the sd_load timeslots must not

exceed the carrier capacity.GPRS timeslot resources are recalculated to ensure

that the remaining number of GDS timeslots aregreater than or equal to the sum of max_gprs_pdch

for each carrier in cells where GPRS is enabled. Thisrecalculation is performed whether in or out of

This parameter can be used only if the GPRS feature isunrestricted.

The sum of all max_gsls specified by the equippedLCFs must be greater than or equal to the total number

of GSLs equipped.The value for max_gsls must not exceed the available

LCF HDLC channel capacity.

Yes

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

The MSI type cannot be changed from GDP to XCDRwhen an enhanced full rate (EFR) or GDP control is

enabled.The MSI type cannot be modified for a PICP MSI.

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. Thisparameter must be less than or equal to the value of

n393.

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted. Thisparameter must be less than or equal to the value of

n393.

The MMS must be locked when modifying thisparameter.

Changing the ne_id causes all AXCDR or ABSSdevice to be cycled, resulting in the loss of all active

calls managed by the associated device.The GPRS feature must be unrestricted to specify

the PCU.

A DRI must be an RF_unit and located at aHorizonoffice site.

The affected device must be locked.

This parameter must be an RTF unique identifier ornull for resetting to no preferred RTF.� �

Yes

None Yes

The GPRS feature must be unrestricted.This parameter is not valid if max_gprs_pdch is set

to 0.The new RTF attributes are not available whenever

the GPRS feature is restricted.Only one GPRS carrier is allowed for each cell.

The carrier is a GPRS carrier if max_gprs_pdch isnot equal to 0.

res_gprs_pdch must not exceed max_gprs_pdch.All GPRS timeslots on the GPRS carrier must have

the same Frequency Hopping Indicator (FHI).If the Concentric Cells feature is unrestricted, the

GPRS carrier must be in the outer zoneThe value of pccch_alloc for the cell can only be set

to 0 if the GPRS option is unrestricted. It is related tobroadcast.

When Dynamic Allocation is in use at the site,terrestrial backing must be available for the reserved

GPRS resources specified by res_gprs_pdch.The GPRS carrier must not be unequipped untilgprs_enabled has been set to zero for the cell.

All GPRS timeslots on the GPRS carrier must havethe same Training Sequence Code.

The 16 kbit/s RSL feature must be unrestricted.The RSL cannot be changed if RSLs are already

equipped for this site.The RSL rate cannot be changed for the BSC (site 0).The RSL cannot be changed if the site uses dynamic

allocation.

Yes

Yes

No




None No

None YES

YES

The sd_priority element cannot be changed for anEGSM, Extended Range Cell, or inner zone carrier.

DYNET must be equipped.This parameter applies only to a BSC.

DYNET must be equipped.This parameter applies only to a BSC.

This parameter is used only if the cell_zoneparameter is set to 1 (inner zone) and the

inner_zone_alg parameter is set to 1 (power baseduse algorithm).

trx_pwr_red can be modified for an RTF that isequipped in the inner_zone of a cell only.

The value of this parameter must be greater than orequal to the value of max_tx_bts if inner_zone_alg

is set to 1 (power based use algorithm).The Concentric Cells option must be unrestricted.


Motorola DB Param Definition

Documents

Transcript of Motorola DB Param Definition